Sprint Nextel Cell Phone EPL 7500 User Manual
User Guide  
www.sprint.com  
© 2009 Sprint. Sprint and the logo are trademarks of Sprint. Other  
marks are the property of their respective owners.  
4/13/09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Entering Text in Portrait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Entering Text in Landscape Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Table of Contents  
Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the  
headings listed here, try the Index on page 203.  
Tip  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i  
Your Phone’s Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i  
Section 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
1A. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Getting to Know Sprint One Click . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Personalizing the Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Personalizing the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
2C. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Activating Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Sprint Account Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Section 2: Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Personalizing Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
TTY Use With Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Phone Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
2D. History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
2A. Phone Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Viewing the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Turning Your Phone On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Navigating Through the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Viewing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
History Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Call From History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Saving a Number From History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Erasing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
2E. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Tip Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
World Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Updating Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Updating the PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
2G. Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Adding a New Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Contacts Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Editing a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . 70  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Numbers . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Deleting a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Adding a New Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry . . . . . . . . . 73  
Assigning a Picture to an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Finding Contacts Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Secret Contacts Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Dialing Sprint Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Wireless Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
2F. Calendar and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) . . . . . . . 91  
Managing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
2H. microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Your Phone’s microSD Card and Adapter . . . 100  
microSD Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
microSD Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Connecting Your Phone to Your Computer . . 103  
2I. Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Recording Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Storing Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Sending Sprint Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Managing Sprint Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Printing Pictures Using PictBridge . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Settings and Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
2J. Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
3B. Web and Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Getting Started With Data Services . . . . . . . . . 144  
Accessing Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Downloading Games, Ringers and More . . . . 152  
Exploring the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Data Services FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music . . . . . . . 161  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . 126  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Voice Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
FTP Contents Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Sending Items Via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Section 3: Sprint Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Music - Sprint Music Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Streaming Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
NASCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
NFL Mobile Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
ScanLife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
3D. GPS Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Text Messaging (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
SMS Voice Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
GPS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Sprint Family Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Getting Driving Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Configuring Your Navigation Preferences . . . . 183  
Launching the Product Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4: Safety and Warranty  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
4A. Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . 186  
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to  
Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Using Your Phone With a Hearing  
Aid Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
User Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Your Phone’s Menu  
This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and all  
the features of your new phone. It’s divided into four  
sections:  
The following table outlines your phone’s main menu  
structure. For more information about using your  
phone’s menus and the carousel main screen, see  
“Navigating Through the Menus” on page 19.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Section 1: Getting Started  
Section 2: Your Phone  
CONTACTS (Right Softkey)  
OPTIONS (Left Softkey)  
1: Main Menu  
Section 3: Sprint Service  
Section 4: Safety and Warranty Information  
Because of updates in phone software, this  
User  
Guide  
Note  
2: Personalize Carousel  
3: Personalize Home Screen  
4: Tutorial  
printed guide may not be the most current  
version for your phone. Visit www.sprint.com  
and log on to My Sprint Wireless to access  
the most recent version of the user guide.  
5: Software Updates  
6: Reset One Click  
7: About Sprint One Click  
Web  
Please refer to the Important Safety  
Information section on page 186 to learn  
about information that will help you safely use  
your phone. Failure to read and follow the  
Important Safety Information in this phone  
guide may result in serious bodily injury,  
death, or property damage.  
WARNING  
Maps  
1: Sprint Navigation  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2: Sprint Family Locator  
Entertainment  
1: Music  
4: Screen Savers  
1: Get New Screen Savers  
2: My Stuff Manager Screen Savers  
5: Applications  
2: TV  
1: Get New Applications  
2: My Stuff Manager Applications  
3: NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile  
3: Games  
4: NFL Mobile Live  
6: Social Zone  
5: ScanLife  
1: Get New Games  
3: Brain Excercise Demo by Namco  
4: CLUE DEMO  
2: My Stuff Manager Games  
6: Call Tones  
5: LEGO Indiana Jones DEMO  
Photos  
History  
1: Camera  
Missed Alerts  
My Stuff  
Press the right softkey to view the following options:  
1: Selftimer  
1: Application Manager  
2: Games  
1: Off  
3: 10 sec  
2: 5 sec  
2: Multi Shot  
1: Get New Games  
2: My Stuff Manager Games  
3: Brain Excercise Demo by Namco  
4: CLUE DEMO  
5: LEGO Indiana Jones DEMO  
1: Series Shot (Off/3/5/10)  
2: Divided Shot (Off/4/9/16)  
3: Fun Tools..  
3: Ringers  
1: Fun Frames  
2: Color Tones  
1: Get New Ringers  
2: My Stuff Manager Ringers  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4: Controls..  
5: Launch  
1: Brightness  
3: Night Shot  
2: White Balance  
4: Metering  
1: Review Pictures  
2: Camera  
3: Picture Mail  
5: Settings..  
1: Inbox  
3: Saved Mail  
2: Sent Mail  
4: Pending  
1: Resolution  
3: Shutter Sound  
5: Storage  
2: Quality  
4: Status Bar  
4: My Albums  
1: In Phone  
3: Online Albums  
2: Memory Card  
6: Launch  
1: Review Pictures  
2: Camcorder  
5: PictBridge  
2: Camcorder (Video Mail/Long Video)  
Press the right softkey to view the following options:  
6: Order Prints  
7: Settings and Info  
1: Selftimer  
1: Off  
3: 10 sec  
2: 5 sec  
1: Auto Save to  
1: Phone  
2: Memory Card  
2: Fun Tools..  
1: Color Tones  
3: Controls..  
1: White Balance  
4: Settings..  
2: Status Bar (On/Off)  
3: Account Info  
Messages  
1: Voicemail  
1: Call Voicemail  
2: Clear Envelope  
1: Quality  
2: Storage  
3: Video Length  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4: Signature  
2: Send Message  
1: On  
2: Off  
1: Text Message  
3: Email  
5: VoiceSMS  
2: Picture Mail  
4: IM  
5: Voice SMS Option  
1: Speakerphone  
2: From Name  
3: Text Message  
4: Picture Mail  
Contacts  
Settings  
1: Inbox  
3: Saved Mail  
2: Sent Mail  
4: Pending  
1: Display  
1: Main Screen  
5: Email  
6: IM  
1: Screen Saver  
2: Brightness  
3: Backlight  
1: AOL Instant Messenger  
2: Windows Live Messenger  
3: Yahoo! Messenger  
7: Chat & Dating  
8: VoiceSMS  
9: Settings  
1: Slide open  
3: 15 seconds  
2: 30 seconds  
4: 8 seconds  
4: PowerSave Mode  
1: On  
2: Off  
1: Notification  
5: Keypad Light  
1: Message & Icon 2: Icon only  
2: Call Back #  
1: Slide open  
3: 15 seconds  
5: Off  
2: 30 seconds  
4: 8 seconds  
3: Preset Messages  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6: Language  
3: My Device Name  
4: My Device Info  
5: Exchange Folders  
1: In Phone  
1: English  
2: Español  
2: Sounds  
1: Volume  
2: Memory card  
1: Ringer  
3: Headset  
5: Advanced...  
2: Earpiece  
4: Speakerphone  
6: Voice Routing Incoming  
1: Hands-Free  
2: Phone  
3: Device Answered  
2: Ringer Type  
7: Voice Routing Outgoing  
1: Incoming Calls  
3: Schedule  
2: Messages  
4: Roam Ringer  
1: Hands-Free  
2: Phone  
3: Device Initiated  
3: Alerts  
4: Messages  
1: Notification  
1: Minute Beep  
3: Connect  
5: Power On  
2: Service  
4: Signal Fade/Call Drop  
6: Power Off  
1: Message & Icon 2: Icon only  
4: Key Tone  
2: Callback Number  
1: Tone Type  
3: Tone Length  
2: Tone Volume  
1: None  
3: Other  
2: XXXXXXXXXX  
3: Bluetooth  
1: On/Off  
3: Pre-set Message  
4: Signature  
2: Visibility  
1: On  
2: Off  
1: Always visible  
3: Hidden  
2: Visible for 3min  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5: Voice SMS Option  
9: Help  
1: Speakerphone  
2: From Name  
6: Phone Info  
1: Phone Number  
2: Icon Glossary  
3: Version  
5: Text Entry  
1: Auto-Capital  
1: On  
2: Off  
2: Auto-Space  
1: On  
4: Advanced  
7: More...  
2: Off  
3: Dual Language  
1: None  
1: Auto Keyguard  
1: On  
2: Spanish  
2: Off  
4: Personal Dictionary  
2: Accessibility  
5: Used Word Dictionary  
1: TTY Options  
3: TTS Setting  
2: Voice Service  
1: Yes  
2: No  
3: Airplane Mode  
6: Display Candidate  
1: On  
3: On PowerUp  
2: Off  
1: Display On  
2: Display Off  
7: Prediction Start  
4: Browser  
1: 2nd letters  
3: 4th letters  
2: 3rd letters  
4: 5th letters  
1: Clear Bookmarks 2: Clear Cache  
3: Clear Cookies 4: Edit Homepage  
8: Auto Word Insertion  
1: On  
2: Off  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5: Call Setup  
12: Security  
1: Auto Answer  
3: Call Answer  
2: Abbreviated Dial  
4: Contacts Match  
1: Change Lock Code  
2: Special #  
3: Erase/Reset  
6: Contacts  
13: Wireless Backup  
1: Speed Numbers 2: Hide Secret  
Tools  
3: My Name Card  
5: Services  
4: Wireless Backup  
1: Alarm  
7: Data  
1: Alarm #1  
3: Alarm #3  
2: Alarm #2  
1: On/Off  
2: Net Guard  
3: Update Data Profile  
2: Bluetooth  
8: Headset Mode  
1: Turbo Button  
9: Location  
1: On  
1: Pair with Hands Free  
2: Send a Contact  
4: Add a New...  
6: More...  
3: Print a Photo...  
5: Trusted Devices  
2: Ringer Sound  
2: Off  
3: Calculator  
10: Restrict and Lock  
4: Tip Calculator  
1: Voice  
2: Data  
5: Calendar  
3: Camera/Pictures 4: Lock my Phone  
1: Personal Calendar  
2: Work Calendar  
2: File Manager  
11: Roaming  
6: Mass Storage  
1: Set Mode  
3: Data Roaming  
2: Call Guard  
1: Connect to PC  
3: Format Memory Card  
4: Memory Info.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7: Memo Pad  
Shopping  
8: World Time  
1: Set DST  
In Use Menu  
Press OPTIONS (right softkey) to display the following  
options:  
9: Update Phone  
1: Update Firmware  
0: Voice Memo  
1: Record  
1: Save  
2: 3-Way Call  
4: Voice Memo  
6: Key Mute/Unmute  
8: Recent History  
0: Whisper On/Off  
2: Update PRL  
3: Contacts  
5: Phone Info  
7: Messaging  
9: Tools  
2: Review  
*: Voice Service  
1: Call <Name or#>  
2: Send Text <Name or #>  
3: Send Picture <Name or #>  
4: Send Voice SMS <Name or #>  
5: Lookup <Name>  
6: More Options  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ⅲ Replace the cover by lining up the tabs and then  
firmly sliding the cover away from the lens until it  
snaps into place.  
1A. Setting Up Service  
2. Press  
to turn the phone on.  
Ⅲ If your phone is activated, it will turn on, search for  
Sprint service, and enter standby mode.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Setting Up Your Phone (page 2)  
Activating Your Phone (page 3)  
Setting Up Your Voicemail (page 3)  
Sprint Account Passwords (page 4)  
Getting Help (page 5)  
Ⅲ If your phone is not yet activated, see “Activating  
Your Phone” on page 3 for more information.  
3. Make your first call.  
Ⅲ Use your keypad to enter a phone number.  
Ⅲ Press  
.
Setting Up Your Phone  
Your phone’s battery should have enough charge for  
your phone to turn on and find a signal, set up your  
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge  
your battery as soon as possible. See “Charging the  
Battery” on page 18 for details.  
Note  
1. Install the battery. (See “Installing the Battery” on  
page 17.)  
Ⅲ In a single motion, press down on the cover and  
slide it towards the lens and then carefully lift the  
battery cover away from the phone.  
Ⅲ Insert the battery into the opening, making sure  
the connectors align. Gently press down to  
secure the battery.  
2
1A. Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If you are having difficulty with activation, contact  
Sprint Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727  
from any other phone.  
Note  
Activating Your Phone  
ⅷ If you purchased your phone at a Sprint Store, it is probably  
activated and ready to use.  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
ⅷ If you received your phone in the mail and it is for a new Sprint  
account or a new line of service, it is designed to activate  
automatically. To confirm your activation, make a  
phone call.  
Your phone automatically transfers all unanswered  
calls to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or  
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and  
personal greeting as soon as your phone is activated.  
ⅷ If you received your phone in the mail and you are activating a  
new phone for an existing number on your account, you will  
need to go online to activate your new phone.  
1. From standby mode, press and hold  
.
Ⅲ From your computer’s Web browser, go to  
www.sprint.com/activate and complete the onscreen  
instructions to activate your phone.  
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Ⅲ Create your passcode.  
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.  
Ⅲ Record your greeting.  
When you have finished, make a phone call to confirm  
your activation. If your phone is still not activated, or you  
do not have access to the Internet, contact Sprint  
Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727 for assistance.  
Voicemail Passcode  
Note  
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a  
passcode when setting up your voicemail to protect  
against unauthorized access. Without a passcode,  
anyone who has access to your handset is able to  
access your voicemail messages.  
Do not press  
Pressing  
while the phone is being activated.  
cancels the activation process.  
Tip  
1A. Setting Up Service  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
For more information about using your voicemail, see  
“Voicemail” on page 132.  
Voicemail Password  
You’ll create your voicemail password (or passcode)  
when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your  
Voicemail” on page 3 for more information on your  
voicemail password.  
Sprint Account Passwords  
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to  
your personal account information, your voicemail  
account, and your data services account. To ensure  
that no one else has access to your information, you  
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.  
Data Services Password  
With your Sprint phone, you may elect to set up an  
optional data services password to control access and  
authorize Premium Service purchases.  
For more information, or to change your passwords,  
sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer  
Service at 1-888-211-4727.  
Account Username and Password  
If you are the account owner, you will create an account  
username and password when you sign on to  
www.sprint.com. (Click Need to register for access? to get  
started.) If you are not the account owner (if someone  
else receives the bill for your Sprint service), you can  
get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.  
4
1A. Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
From Your Sprint Phone  
Getting Help  
ⅷ Press  
account balance.  
to check minute usage and  
Managing Your Account  
ⅷ Press  
to make a payment.  
Online: www.sprint.com  
ⅷ Access your account information.  
ⅷ Press  
to access a summary of your  
Sprint service plan or get answers to other questions.  
ⅷ Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint  
service plan).  
From Any Other Phone  
ⅷ Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.  
ⅷ Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.  
ⅷ View and pay your bill.  
ⅷ Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.  
ⅷ Purchase accessories.  
ⅷ Shop for the latest Sprint phones.  
ⅷ View available Sprint service plans and options.  
ⅷ Learn more about data services and other products  
like Sprint Picture Mail, games, ringers, screen  
savers, and more.  
1A. Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
 
Sprint 411  
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and  
information, including residential, business, and  
government listings; movie listings or showtimes;  
driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major  
local event information. You can get up to three pieces  
of information per call, and the operator can  
automatically connect your call at no additional charge.  
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you  
will be billed for airtime.  
ᮣ
Press  
.
Sprint Operator Services  
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you  
place collect calls or when you place calls billed to a  
local telephone calling card or third party.  
ᮣ
Press  
.
For more information or to see the latest in products  
and services, visit us online at www.sprint.com.  
6
1A. Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 2  
Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Phone  
2A. Phone Basics  
13. Earpiece  
1. Indicator LED  
2. Status Bar  
Icons  
12. MENU/OK  
3. Display Screen  
4. Navigation Key  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Your Phone (page 8)  
Viewing the Display Screen (page 11)  
Turning Your Phone On and Off (page 15)  
Battery and Charger (page 16)  
5. Softkey (right)  
Portrait Mode  
5. Softkey (left)  
Portrait Mode  
11. BACK/Clear Key  
10. END/POWER Key  
6. Speaker Key  
7. TALK Key  
Navigating Through the Menus (page 19)  
Displaying Your Phone Number (page 20)  
Making and Answering Calls (page 20)  
Entering Text in Portrait Mode (page 30)  
8. Keypad  
9. Microphone  
15. Headset Jack  
16. Camera Lens  
Phone Software Upgrades – Updates to your  
phone’s software may become available from time  
to time. Sprint will automatically upload critical  
updates to your phone. You can also use the menu  
to check for and download updates. Highlight  
Tip  
14. Volume  
Button  
17. microSD Card  
slot  
and press  
for and download available updates.  
> Tools > Update Phone to search  
18. Charger/Accessories  
Jack  
19. Camera Button  
Portrait Mode  
8
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7. TALK Key (  
answer Call Waiting, use Three-Way Calling, or  
activate Voice Dial.  
) allows you to place or receive calls,  
Key Functions  
1. Indicator LED shows your phone’s connection status  
at a glance.  
8. Keypad lets you enter numbers, letters, and  
characters, and navigate within menus. Press and  
hold keys for speed dialing.  
2. Status Bar Icons provide information about your  
phone’s status and options, such as signal  
strength, roaming, ringer setting, messaging, and  
battery charge.  
9. Microphone allows other callers to hear you clearly  
when you are speaking to them.  
3. Display Screen displays all the information needed  
to operate your phone, such as the call status, the  
Contacts list, the date and time, and the signal and  
battery strength.  
10. END/POWER Key (  
) lets you turn the phone on  
or off, end a call, or return to standby mode. While  
in the main menu, it returns the phone to standby  
mode and cancels your input. When you receive  
an incoming call, press to enter ignore/reject the  
call.  
4. Navigation Key scrolls through the phone’s menu  
options and acts as a shortcut key from standby  
mode.  
11. BACK/Clear Key deletes characters from the display  
in text entry mode. When in a menu, pressing  
returns you to the previous menu. This key  
also allows you to return to the previous screen in  
a data session.  
5. Softkeys Portrait Mode let you select left and right  
softkey actions or menu items corresponding to  
the bottom left and bottom right lines on the  
Display Screen when the phone is in portrait mode.  
6. Speaker Key lets you place or receive calls in  
12. MENU/OK lets you access the phone’s menus and  
selects the highlighted choice when navigating  
through a menu.  
speakerphone mode.  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
   
13. Earpiece lets you hear the caller and automated  
19. Camera Button lets you activate the camera and  
prompts.  
camcorder and take pictures and videos.  
14. Volume Button allows you to adjust the ringer  
volume in standby mode or adjust the voice  
volume during a call. The volume button can also  
be used to scroll up or down to navigate through  
the different menu options.  
Landscape Phone Features  
27. End/Back Key  
20. QWERTY  
Keyboard  
15. Headset Jack allows you to plug in either a stereo  
headset (sold seperately) or an optional headset  
for convenient, hands-free conversations.  
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect  
jack may damage the phone.  
21. Softkey  
(right )  
21. Softkey  
(left)  
22. Fn Key  
16. Camera Lens, as part of the built-in camera, lets you  
take pictures and videos.  
23. Shift Key  
24. Symbol Key  
25. Space Key  
26. Enter/OK Key  
17. microSD Card slot lets you use the included microSD  
card to expand the memory of your phone. (See  
“Removing the microSD Card” on page 100.)  
Landscape Mode  
20. QWERTY keyboard provides an alphanumeric  
18. Charger/Accessory Jack allows you to connect the  
phone charger or an optional USB cable  
character keyboard layout.  
(included). CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into  
the incorrect jack may damage the phone.  
21. Softkeys Landscape Mode lets you select softkey  
actions or menu items corresponding to the  
bottom right line on the display screen while the  
phone is in landscape mode.  
10  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22. Fn Key (Function) key, toggle to access the  
numbers/symbols atop each key on the QWERTY  
keyboard.  
Viewing the Display Screen  
Your phone’s display screen provides information  
about your phone’s status and options. This list  
identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s  
display screen:  
23. Shift Key lets you toggle alphabet characters  
between mixed case, uppercase and lowercase.  
Character case remains as selected until the Shift  
key is pressed again.  
To view a list of your phone’s icons and descriptions,  
from the main menu select Settings > Phone Info >  
Icon Glossary.  
Tip  
24. Symbol Key lets you access symbol characters.  
25. Space Key lets you add spaces between words and  
characters.  
For information about using your phone’s main  
screen carousel, see “2B. Navigating the Main  
Screen” on page 40.  
Note  
26. Enter/OK Key lets you perform the function  
highlighted in the current menu. Press to enter  
additional lines of text.  
Status Bar – Service Icons  
27. End/Back Key deletes characters from the display in  
text entry mode. When in a menu, pressing  
returns you to the previous menu. This key also  
allows you to return to the previous screen in a  
data session.  
Signal Strength – Shows your current signal  
strength. (More bars = stronger signal.)  
No Service – Your phone cannot find a usable  
signal.  
Roaming – Your phone is “roaming” off the  
Nationwide Sprint Network.  
2A. Phone Basics  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Status Bar – Service Icons  
Status Bar – Status Icons  
Data Service Available – Sprint mobile broadband  
data service (EVDO) is available. When active  
and communicating, the icon is animated.  
Location On – Your phone’s location feature is on  
and available for location-based services such  
as GPS Navigation.  
Data Service Dormant – Sprint mobile broadband  
data service (EVDO) is dormant.  
Location Off – Your phone’s location feature is off.  
Your location is available only for 911 (see page  
page 174).  
Data Service Active – Sprint mobile broadband  
data service (EVDO) is active.  
Microphone Muted – Your phone’s microphone is  
muted.  
Data Service Status – Current status of the Sprint  
mobile broadband data service.  
Key tones Muted – Your phone’s key tones are  
muted.  
3G Status – Sprint 1xRTT data service is  
available. When active, the icon is animated.  
Speakerphone Enabled – Your phone’s  
speakerphone feature is enabled.  
3G Sending – Sprint 1xRTT data service is  
transmitting data.  
Vibrate Only – The ringer is set to vibrate only.  
3G Receiving – Sprint 1xRTT data service is  
receiving data.  
Ring and Vibrate – Your phone has the ringer  
volume set and the vibrate option checked  
(enabled).  
3G Dormant – Data service is currently dormant.  
Ringer Off – Ringer is turned off and vibrate  
mode is disabled.  
Battery Strength – Shows your current battery  
charge level. (Icon shown is fully charged.)  
Ringer Off and Vibrate – Your phone has the ringer  
deactivated and the vibrate option checked  
(enabled).  
Low battery – Shows your current battery charge  
level is low.  
12  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Bar – Status Icons  
Status Bar – Messaging Icons  
1 Beep – Your phone is set to beep when an  
New Voicemail – You have a new voicemail  
incoming call is received.  
message. Press and hold  
voicemail box.  
to call your  
1 Beep and Vibrate – Your phone is set to beep  
and vibrate when an incoming call is received.  
New Email Message – You have new email  
messages.  
TTY Mode – Your phone is operating in TTY  
mode.  
Urgent Message – You have new message  
marked as Urgent.  
Alarm – An alarm has been set on your phone.  
Missed Picture Mail – You have a new Picture mail  
message.  
SSL – Your phone is using SSL (Secure Sockets  
Layer) protocol for client/server communication.  
Missed Text/Email Messages – You have new  
unread text or email messages.  
Missed Voicemail Messages – You have new  
unheard vociemail messages.  
Status Bar – Messaging Icons  
New Text Message – You have new text  
messages.  
Missed VoiceSMS Message – You have a new  
SMS (unread) VoiceSMS message.  
New Picture Mail Message – You have new picture  
mail messages.  
Read VoiceSMS Message – Indicates a recently  
read VoiceSMS message.  
SMS  
New VoiceSMS Message – You have new  
SMS VoiceSMS messages.  
Locked – Your message is locked.  
2A. Phone Basics  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Icons  
Other Icons  
White Balance (Cloudy) – The white balance has  
been set to Cloudy. This is used for taking  
pictures or movies outdoors under cloudy  
conditions.  
Missed Call – You have missed an incoming call.  
Missed Call Alert – You have missed a call alert.  
White Balance (Tungsten) – The white balance has  
been set to Tungsten. This is used for taking  
pictures or movies indoors under normal  
lighting conditions.  
Multiple Alerts – You have multiple alert  
messages.  
Missed Alarm Event – You have missed an alarm  
event.  
White Balance (Fluorescent) – The white balance  
has been set to Fluorescent. This is used for  
taking pictures or movies indoors under  
fluorescent lighting conditions.  
Calendar Event – You have a pending event  
scheduled.  
Missed Event – You missed a scheduled event.  
White Balance (Manual) – The white balance has  
been set to Manual. This is used for taking  
pictures indoors or outdoors using your own  
custom settings.  
Camera Mode – The camera is enabled and you  
are in Camera Mode.  
Camcorder Mode – The camcorder is enabled  
and you are in Camcorder Mode.  
Recording – A video or voice memo is currently  
being recorded.  
Self-Timer – The self-timer function is enabled.  
Pause – A voice memo or video has been  
paused.  
White Balance (Sunny) – The white balance has  
been set to Sunny. This is used for taking  
pictures or movies outdoors on bright sunny  
days.  
Play – A a voice memo or video is playing.  
14  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning Your Phone On and Off  
Other Icons  
Media Upload – Files have been uploaded to an  
online album or folder.  
Turning Your Phone On  
Bluetooth (Enabled/Active) – The Bluetooth  
technology is active and enabled.  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
for two seconds.  
Once your phone is on, it may display “Searching for  
Service.” When your phone finds a signal, it enters  
standby mode – the phone’s idle state. At this point,  
you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.  
Bluetooth (Connected) – The Bluetooth device is  
connected.  
Bluetooth (Headset Connected) – The Bluetooth  
Headset is connected and visible.  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes  
of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically  
activated. When a signal is found, your phone  
automatically returns to standby mode.  
Bluetooth (Stereo Connected) – The Bluetooth  
stereo device is connected and visible.  
Bluetooth (Hidden) – The device is hidden to  
other Bluetooth devices and not transmitting its  
information.  
In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal  
periodically without your intervention. You can also  
initiate a search for Sprint service by pressing any key  
(when your phone is turned on).  
Background Application +1 – Indicates that more  
than one application is currently running and  
one has been minimized and placed in the  
background.  
The Power Save feature conserves your battery  
power when you are in an area where there is no  
signal.  
Tip  
Wireless Backup – A current wireless backup  
session is in progress.  
2A. Phone Basics  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Battery Capacity  
Turning Your Phone Off  
Your phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)  
battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is  
fully drained. The battery provides up to 4.75 hours of  
continuous digital talk time.  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
the powering-down animation on the display  
screen.  
for two seconds until you see  
Your screen remains blank while your phone is off  
(unless the battery is charging).  
When the battery reaches 5% of its capacity, the battery  
icon blinks. When there are approximately two minutes  
of talk time left, the phone sounds an audible alert and  
then turns off.  
Battery and Charger  
Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce  
the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Note  
Use only Sprint-approved or Samsung-  
approved batteries and chargers with your  
phone. The failure to use a Sprint-approved or  
Samsung-approved battery and charger may  
increase the risk that your phone will overheat,  
catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious  
bodily injury, death, or property damage.  
WARNING  
Watch your phone’s battery level indicator and  
charge the battery before it runs out of power.  
Tip  
Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved batteries and  
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through  
Samsung; or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re  
also available at www.sprint.com.  
16  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing the Battery  
1. In a single motion, press down on the cover and  
slide it towards the lens (1) and then carefully lift  
the battery cover away from the phone (2).  
ꢀ
3. Replace the cover by lining up the tabs and then  
firmly sliding the cover away from the lens until it  
snaps into place.  
Removing the Battery  
2. Insert the battery into the opening, making sure to  
line up the gold contacts (3). Gently press down to  
secure the battery (4).  
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose  
any stored numbers or messages.  
2. In a single motion, press down on the cover and  
slide it towards the lens, then remove the battery  
from the phone (1 and 2).  
2A. Phone Basics  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
It is recommended that you completely charge your  
battery first before using your phone. This guarantees  
you begin using your phone with a fully charged  
battery.  
Tip  
ᮣ
Plug the flat end of the charger into the phone’s  
charger/accessrories jack and the other end into  
an electrical outlet.  
Charge Indicator  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion  
battery as you can be burned.  
WARNING  
Charging the Battery  
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If  
your battery level becomes too low, your phone  
automatically turns off, and you will lose any  
information you were just working on.  
Always use a Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved  
desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power  
adapter to charge your battery.  
18  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ⅲ A red indicator light means the battery is charging.  
To navigate through a menu, press the navigation key  
up or down. If you are in a first-level menu, such as  
Settings, you may also navigate to the next or previous  
first-level menu by pressing the navigation key left or  
right.  
Ⅲ A green indicator light means the battery is at least  
90 percent charged.  
Ⅲ A battery icon (  
) indicates the current charge  
level of the internal battery.  
For a diagram of your phone’s menu, please see “Your  
Phone’s Menu” on page i.  
With the Sprint-approved Li-Ion battery, you can  
recharge the battery before it becomes completely run  
down.  
Selecting Menu Items  
As you navigate through the menu using the navigation  
Navigating Through the Menus  
key (  
), menu options are highlighted. Select any  
. If the  
option by highlighting it and pressing  
option is numbered, you can select it by pressing the  
corresponding number on the phone’s keypad.  
The navigation key on your phone lets you scroll  
through onscreen items. Many menus feature a scroll  
bar on the right to help you keep track of your position  
in the menu.  
For example, to view your text messages:  
1. From the main screen, scroll left or right to  
Your phone’s Sprint One Click main screen gives  
you instant access to your favorite features. See  
“2B. Navigating the Main Screen” on page 40 for  
complete information.  
Note  
highlight  
and then press  
to access the  
main menu.  
2. Select Messages by highlighting it and  
pressing  
.
3. Select Text Message by highlighting it and  
pressing  
.
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
       
4. Highlight a message and press  
message text.  
to view the  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
For the purposes of this guide, the above steps  
condense into:  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Phone  
Info > Phone Number. (Your phone number and other  
information about your phone and account will be  
displayed.)  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Messages > Text  
Messages.  
Backing Up Within a Menu  
Making and Answering Calls  
To go to the previous menu:  
Making Calls  
ᮣ
Press  
To return to standby mode:  
Press  
.
1. Open the slider in Portrait Mode (see “Your Phone”  
on page 8) to access the keypad.  
ᮣ
.
2. Enter a phone number from standby mode. (If you  
make a mistake while dialing, press  
the numbers.)  
to erase  
3. Press  
. (To make a call when you are roaming  
and then  
. See “Call Guard” on page 142.)  
and Call Guard is enabled, press  
press  
4. Press  
finished.  
or close the phone when you are  
20  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ⅷ Contact Details: Displays the details for a Contact if the  
entered number matches a previously created entry.  
To redial your last outgoing call, press  
To redial other recent numbers, press  
twice.  
Tip  
, highlight  
ⅷ Save: Enter a seven-digit or ten-digit number (phone  
number and area code) and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Save to save the phone number in your  
Contacts. (See “Saving a Phone Number” on  
page 26.)  
a number, and press  
again.  
When making calls off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, always dial using 11 digits (1 + area code +  
phone number).  
You can also place calls from your phone by speed  
dialing numbers from your Contacts (page 29), using  
Voice Dial (page 91), using your History listings  
(page 65), and Voice Services (page 91).  
To speed dial a phone number from standby mode,  
press and hold the speed dial number. If the speed  
dial number is two digits, enter the first digit, and then  
press and hold the second digit. (For information on  
setting up speed dial numbers, see “Assigning  
Speed Dial Numbers” on page 71.) (This feature will  
not work when you are roaming off the Nationwide  
Sprint Network; when roaming you must dial using  
eleven digits [1 + the area code + the seven-digit  
phone number].)  
Tip  
Dialing Options  
When you enter numbers in standby mode, you will  
see a variety of dialing options displayed as softkeys on  
the phone’s screen.  
ⅷ Hard Pause: Enter digits and then use this feature to  
enter a hard pause within a number string (the  
phone waits for your input). To continue dialing, you  
To send a message to the number, press SEND MSG  
(left softkey).  
– or –  
must press the  
key. (See “Dialing and Saving  
Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 27.)  
To initiate an option, press OPTIONS (right softkey), then  
press the corresponding softkey.  
2A. Phone Basics  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ⅷ 2sec Pause: Enter digits and then use this feature to  
enter a 2 second delay within a number string (the  
phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any  
additional keys being pressed). (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 27.)  
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your  
Contacts, the entry’s name is displayed. You may also  
see the caller’s phone number, if available.  
If you set Call Answer to Talk Key (see “Call Answer  
Mode” on page 59), you also see the following options.  
To select an option, press the corresponding softkey.  
Answering Calls  
ⅷ SILENCE (left softkey) to mute the onboard speaker  
and temporarily silence the ringer.  
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off,  
incoming calls go to voicemail.)  
ⅷ IGNORE (right softkey) to send the call to your  
voicemail box.  
2. Press  
to answer an incoming call.  
(Depending on your settings, you may also answer  
incoming calls by opening the phone or by  
pressing any number key. See “Call Answer Mode”  
on page 59 for more information.)  
To quiet the ringer, press  
button.  
or press the volume  
Note  
Answering a Roam Call With Call Guard Enabled  
Your phone notifies you of incoming calls in the  
following ways:  
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your  
roaming charges when making or receiving calls while  
outside the Nationwide Sprint Network. Please see  
“Roaming” on page 141 for more information about  
roaming.  
ⅷ The phone rings or vibrates.  
ⅷ The indicator light flashes.  
ⅷ The backlight illuminates.  
ᮣ
Press ANSWER (left softkey) to answer the call. (See  
“Call Guard” on page 142 for additional  
information.)  
ⅷ The screen displays an incoming call message.  
22  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calling Emergency Numbers  
When your phone is off, calls go directly to voicemail.  
Note  
You can place calls to 911 (dial  
even if your phone is locked or your account is  
restricted.  
),  
Ending a Call  
ᮣ
Press  
.
When you place an emergency call, your phone  
automatically enters Emergency mode.  
Note  
Missed Call Notification  
When you do not answer an incoming call, your screen  
displays the Missed Call log.  
During an emergency call, press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) to display your options. Highlight an option and  
press  
.
To display the Missed Call entry from the notification screen:  
Press My Phone # (left softkey) to display your phone  
number during an emergency call.  
Tip  
ᮣ
Highlight the entry and press  
phone number, press .)  
. (To dial the  
To exit Emergency mode:  
To display a Missed Call entry from standby mode:  
ᮣ
Press  
to end a 911 call.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Missed Alerts.  
When you are in Emergency mode, you can exit by  
Note  
2. Highlight an entry and press  
.
pressing  
then pressing  
(or  
then  
).  
To deactivate the Emergency call in standby mode:  
ᮣ
Press  
until Emergency mode is exited.  
2A. Phone Basics  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ⅷ Save to add the new number to your Contacts list.  
Enhanced 911 (E911) Information  
ⅷ 3-Way Call to initiate a three-way call. (For more  
information, see “Making a Three-Way Call” on page  
140.)  
This phone features an embedded Global Positioning  
System (GPS) chip necessary for utilizing E911  
emergency location services where available.  
ⅷ Contacts to display your Contacts list.  
When you place an emergency 911 call, the GPS  
feature of your phone seeks information to calculate  
your approximate location. Depending on several  
variables, including availability and access to satellite  
signals, it may take up to 30 seconds or more to  
determine and report your approximate location.  
ⅷ Voice Memo allows you to record incoming audio from  
your conversation. (For more information, see  
“Managing Voice Memos” on page 97.)  
ⅷ Phone Info displays the following menu options:  
Ⅲ Phone Number - your phone number  
Always report your location to the 911  
operator when placing an emergency call.  
Some designated emergency call takers,  
known as Public Safety Answering Points  
(PSAPs) may not be equipped to receive GPS  
location information from your phone.  
Important  
Ⅲ Icon Glossary - a list of currently available icons  
Ⅲ Version - phone software version  
Ⅲ Advanced - additional technical information  
ⅷ Key Mute/Unmute allows you to mute the key tones  
from being heard by the caller.  
ⅷ Messaging accesses the Messaging menu options.  
In-Call Options  
ⅷ Recent History checks your call log for Recent calls.  
You can also erase the logs from this menu.  
Pressing OPTIONS (right softkey) during a call displays a  
list of available in-call features. To select an option,  
press the corresponding keypad number or highlight  
the option and press  
. The following options may  
be available through the Options menu:  
24  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ⅷ Tools accesses the Tools menu options.  
Ⅲ Calendar - your calendar entries  
Using the Speakerphone  
To use your phone handsfree or to share a call with  
other people:  
Ⅲ Bluetooth - a list of current Bluetooth devices  
Ⅲ Memo Pad - onscreen memo pad  
Ⅲ Alarm - your Alarm events and menu  
Ⅲ Calculator - onscreen calculator  
1. Place your phone in Speaker Mode by pressing  
and holding the Speaker key (  
speaker mode” appears in the display.  
) until “Entering  
Because of higher volume levels, do not  
place the phone near your ear during  
speakerphone use.  
ⅷ Whisper On/Off increases the microphone to its  
maximum level. During a call turn on Whisper On  
when speaking softly or when the caller cannot hear  
your voice clearly. This mode is useful in meetings or  
public places. Return the phone back to normal  
operation by selecting Whisper Off.  
WARNING  
2. To disable Speaker Mode, press and hold  
until “Exit speaker mode” appears in the display.  
End-of-Call Options  
Press MUTE (left softkey) during a call to mute the  
microphone. Press UNMUTE (left softkey) to unmute the  
microphone.  
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone  
number that is not in your Contacts, the phone displays  
the phone number and the duration of the call. Press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Save to add the new number  
to your Contacts. (See “Saving a Phone Number” on  
page 26.)  
Ⅲ While muted, the word Mute blinks on the  
upper-right portion of the main display screen.  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
     
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone  
number that is already in your Contacts, the phone  
displays the entry name, phone number, and the  
duration of the call. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) >  
Contact Details to view the Contacts listing for the  
number.  
4. Use the keypad to enter the new contact name  
and press . (See “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30. or See “Entering Text in  
Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
– or –  
Search for an existing contact name and press  
to save the new number.  
The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls  
identified as No ID or Restricted.  
Note  
5. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the entry. You are  
then notified if the number was successfully  
added.  
Saving a Phone Number  
You can store up to 600 contact entries in total, with  
each contact entry containing a maximum of seven  
phone numbers for a total phone book capacity of  
4200 numbers. Each entry’s name can contain 64  
characters. Your phone automatically sorts the  
Contacts entries alphabetically. (For more information,  
see “2E. Contacts” on page 68.)  
Information can also be entered while the phone is in  
landscape mode (page 34).  
Note  
Finding a Phone Number  
You can search Contacts for entries by name.  
1. Press CONTACTS (right softkey) and enter the first  
letter or letters of an entry. (The more letters you  
enter, the more specific the search.)  
To save a number from standby mode:  
1. Enter a phone number and press  
.
2. To display an entry, highlight it and press  
dial a number, highlight it and press  
. To  
2. Select New Entry or Existing Entry and press  
.
.
3. Select a label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax, or  
Others) and press  
.
26  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can also search Contacts by using a specific string  
of numbers.  
Creating a saved series of numbers with pauses is  
very useful when entering data into an automated  
system. For example, if accessing your bank  
information requires dialing a toll-free number,  
followed by an account number and then your PIN,  
you could place a two-second pause after each  
group of numbers to ensure that they would be read  
correctly.  
Tip  
1. Enter four or more of the last digits in standby  
mode. (The more numbers you enter, the more  
specific the search becomes.)  
Ⅲ Matching Contacts entries are displayed within an  
onscreen list.  
2. To display the Contacts entry that contains the  
There are two types of pauses available on your phone:  
phone number you entered, select the entry and  
ⅷ Hard Pause sends the next set of numbers when you  
press  
.
press  
. (This is indicated with a P within the  
– or –  
number sequence.)  
To dial the number, highlight the entry from the list  
and press  
ⅷ 2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of  
numbers after two seconds. (This is indicated with a  
H within the number sequence.)  
.
Dialing and Saving Phone Numbers With  
Pauses  
You can have multiple pauses in a phone number  
and combine two-second and hard pauses.  
Note  
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for  
use with automated systems, such as voicemail or  
credit card billing numbers.  
To dial or save phone numbers with pauses:  
1. Enter the phone number.  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Hard Pause or  
2sec Pause.  
3. Enter additional numbers.  
2A. Phone Basics  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Press  
to dial the number.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
– or –  
Abbreviated Dialing is similar to speed dialing. You can  
use either of the following abbreviated dialing features.  
Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Save to save the  
number in your Contacts.  
ⅷ Contacts Match – Retrieve any number saved in your  
Contacts by entering the last four to six digits of the  
When dialing a number with a hard pause, press  
to send the next set of numbers.  
Note  
number. Press  
page 60.)  
to dial the retrieved number. (See  
Plus (+) Code Dialing  
ⅷ Prepend/Abbreviated Dialing – Prepend the first five or  
six digits (for example, the area code and prefix) to  
When placing international calls, you can use Plus  
Code Dialing to automatically enter the international  
access code for your location (for example, 011 for  
international calls placed from the United States).  
any four or five digits you enter. Press  
to dial the  
resulting number. (See page 60 to register a prepend  
number and activate the Prepend feature.)  
To place a call using Contacts Match Abbreviated Dialing:  
To make a call using Plus Code Dialing:  
1. Enter the last four to six digits of a Contacts entry’s  
phone number.  
1. Press and hold  
phone display.  
until a “+” appears on your  
2. Press  
to call the displayed number. (If there is  
2. Dial the country code and phone number you’re  
calling and press . (The access code for  
international dialing will automatically be dialed,  
followed by the country code and phone number.)  
more than one matched number in your Contacts,  
your phone displays the available matches.  
Highlight a name and then press  
call.)  
to place a  
28  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
To place a call using Prepend Abbreviated Dialing:  
To use One-Touch Dialing for speed dial locations 2–9:  
1. Enter the last four digits of the number.  
ᮣ
Press and hold the appropriate key for  
approximately two seconds. The display confirms  
that you have dialed the number when it shows  
“Connecting...”.  
2. Press  
.
Dialing From the Contacts List  
To use Two-Touch Dialing for speed dial locations 10–99:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts.  
1. Press the first digit.  
From standby mode, press CONTACTS (right  
softkey) to list entries.  
Shortcut  
2. Press and hold the second digit for approximately  
two seconds. The display confirms that you have  
dialed the number when it shows “Connecting...”.  
2. Highlight the entry you want to call and press  
to dial the entry’s default phone number.  
Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming;  
when you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you must always dial using eleven digits  
(1 + area code + number).  
Note  
– or –  
To dial another number from the entry, highlight  
the name and press  
number and press  
, and then highlight a  
.
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 98 numbers in your phone’s speed  
dial memory. Dial speed dial entries using one  
keypress for locations 2–9 or two keypresses for  
locations 10–99.  
2A. Phone Basics  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ⅲ Number to enter numbers by pressing the  
numbers on the keypad. (See page 32.)  
Entering Text in Portrait Mode  
Ⅲ Emoticons to enter “emoticons.” (See page 32.)  
Your phone provides convenient ways to enter letters,  
numbers, and symbols whenever you are prompted to  
enter text (for example, when adding a Contacts entry  
or when using Sprint Mail and Text Messaging).  
Ⅲ Text Options to configure these options:  
Auto-Capital, Used words,Display Cand, Prediction Start,  
Dual Language, Auto-Space, and Auto Word Insertion  
(see page 33).  
In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter  
text while the phone is in portrait mode where the  
keypad is the primary method of both text and  
character entry.  
When entering text, press the * (Shift) key to change  
letter capitalization (abc > Abc > ABC).  
Tip  
T9 Text Input  
Selecting a Text Input Mode  
T9 Text Input lets you enter text by pressing keys just  
once per letter. (To select the T9 (English) mode when  
entering text, see “Selecting a Text Input Mode” on  
page 30.)  
ᮣ
From a screen where you can enter text, press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Text Mode to change the  
text input mode.  
Ⅲ T9(English) to enter text using a predictive text  
system that reduces the number of keypresses  
required while entering a word. (See page 30.)  
T9 Text Input uses an intuitive word database to  
analyze the letters you enter and create a suitable  
word. (The word may change as you type.)  
Ⅲ Alpha to enter alpha characters associated with  
the letters on the keypad. (See page 31.)  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, press  
Options (right softkey) > Text Mode to change the text  
input mode.  
Ⅲ Symbols to enter symbols. (See page 32.)  
2. Select the T9(English) text input mode.  
30  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
3. Press the corresponding keys once per letter to  
2. Enter the word using Alpha mode. (See “ABC  
Mode” on page 31.) The word will appear as an  
option the next time you scroll through options  
during T9 Text Input.  
enter a word. (For example, to enter the word “Bill,”  
press  
press  
hold  
) (If you make a mistake,  
to erase a single character. Press and  
to erase all previously entered text.)  
For more information about T9 Text Input, visit the  
Nuance Web site at www.nuance.com/T9/textinput/.  
Ⅲ To get the uppercase B in the above example,  
press until the capitalization indicator  
ABC Mode  
displays T9WORD. This keeps all consecutive  
letters uppercase until you change this setting.  
In Alpha mode, also known as multi-tap entry, you press  
keys one, two, three, or four times to enter the letters  
you see on the keypad. For example, press  
for “a,” twice for “b”, or three times for “c”; or press  
Ⅲ Use T9Word to make only the first character intial  
uppercase (all consective characters are  
lowercased).  
once  
once for “p,” twice for “q,” three times for “r,” or four times  
for “s.”  
If the word you want is not displayed after you have  
entered all the letters, press  
additional word selections. To accept a word and insert  
a space, press  
to scroll through  
1. Select the Alpha mode. (See “Selecting a Text Input  
Mode” on page 30.)  
.
Adding a Word to the T9 Database  
2. Press the corresponding keys repeatedly until the  
correct letter appears. (For example, to enter the  
If a word you want to enter is not displayed as an  
option when you are using T9 Text Input, add it to the  
database by selecting the Alpha mode.  
word “Bill,” press  
three times, and  
twice,  
three times again.)  
to erase a  
to erase all  
three times,  
(If you make a mistake, press  
single character. Press and hold  
previously entered text.)  
1. Select the Alpha text input mode. (See “Selecting a  
Text Input Mode” on page 30.)  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
   
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and  
the following letters are lowercased. After a character is  
entered, the cursor automatically advances to the next  
space after two seconds or when you enter a character  
on a different key.  
When selecting Dual Language, Spanish characters  
are also added to those listed.  
Note  
Entering Numbers, Symbols, Emoticons,  
and Preset Messages  
Characters scroll in the following order:  
To enter numbers:  
English Sequence  
Key  
ᮣ
Select the Number mode and press the appropriate  
key. (See “Selecting a Text Input Mode” on  
page 30.)  
Upper Case  
Lower Case  
. , @ 1 ? ! # /  
*
A B C 2  
D E F 3  
G H I 4  
a b c 2  
d e f 3  
g h i 4  
To enter symbols:  
ᮣ
Select the Symbols mode. (See “Selecting a Text  
Input Mode” on page 30.) To enter a symbol, press  
the appropriate key indicated on the display.  
J K L 5  
j k l 5  
M N O 6  
P Q R S 7  
T U V 8  
m n o 6  
p q r s 7  
t u v 8  
To enter “emoticons” (smileys):  
ᮣ
Select the Emoticons mode and press the  
appropriate key. (See “Selecting a Text Input  
Mode” on page 30.)  
W XY Z 9  
0
w x y z 9  
One-character- shifted  
Space  
32  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To enter preset messages:  
To specify text options:  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Add Preset Message. (See  
“Selecting a Text Input Mode” on page 30.)  
1. When you display a screen where you can enter  
text, press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Text Mode > Text  
Options and then use your navigation key to scroll  
down the list and activate the desired text entry  
options:  
2. Select a message and press  
.
Preset messages make composing text messages  
easier by allowing you to enter quick messages,  
such as “Meet me at,” “Let’s get lunch,” or a  
customized message of your own. (For more  
information on preset messages, please see  
“Managing Preset Messages” on page 55.)  
Note  
Ⅲ Auto-Capital allows you to turn on or off the  
capitalization of the next character after a full stop  
punctuation is followed by a space.  
Ⅲ Used words allows you to use the entire static  
database (included) plus learn and promote new  
or frequently used words.  
Setting Text Options  
Ⅲ Display Candidate allows the phone to display  
predicted words, either one at a time or as a list.  
The Text Options menu allows you to specify more  
automated features during the text entry process.  
These options can help streamline the text entry  
process by correcting for capitalization, spelling,  
spacing, and completing the most commonly entered  
words for you.  
Ⅲ Prediction Start At allows you to configure the  
phone to display possible word candidates after a  
preset number of characters have been entered.  
You can choose the feature to begin after the 2nd,  
3rd, 4th, or 5th letters.  
Ⅲ Dual Language allows you to select word  
candidates to display in English only (None) or in  
Spanish (Spanish).  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
Ⅲ Auto-Space allows you to turn on or off the ability  
to insert a space automatically after a word is  
selected from the candidate list.  
2. Select Spanish and press  
. (See “Setting Text  
Options” on page 33.)  
To disable dual language mode:  
Ⅲ Auto Word Insertion allows you to turn on or off the  
ability to insert predictive words into the text.  
1. When you display a screen where you can enter  
text, press the OPTIONS (right softkey) > Text Mode >  
Text Options > Dual Language.  
2. When you have completed making your changes  
to these options, press  
or press CLOSE (right  
2. Select None.  
softkey) to go back to the previous screen.  
You can also access Text Entry options from the  
Settings menu. Press Menu > Settings > Text Entry.  
Note  
Entering Text in Landscape Mode  
Entering Characters In Dual Language  
Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard  
By enabling the Dual Language text option, you can  
use the keys for both English and Spanish text entry. If  
the Display Cand and Prediction Start text options are  
enabled, the available word choices presented are from  
both language sets (English/Spanish).  
The Samsung Exclaim™ has a built-in, keyboard-style  
keypad, referred to as a full QWERTY keyboard. The  
keyboard is located beneath the display screen and is  
accessed by sliding it open. This orients the phone's  
display to landscape (widescreen) mode.  
To enter characters in dual language mode:  
Using the QWERTY keyboard, you can type letters,  
numbers, punctuation, and other special characters  
into text entry fields or other applications simpler and  
faster than using the telephone keypad.  
1. When you display a screen where you can enter  
text, press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Text Mode > Text  
Options > Dual Language.  
34  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To open the phone and access the keyboard:  
Navigation and Options in Landscape  
Mode  
1. Rotate the phone 90 degrees counter-clockwise.  
2. Slide the top section of the phone up to open, as  
shown in the illustration. When you slide the phone  
open, the display rotates from a vertical viewing  
mode (portrait) to a horizontal viewing mode  
(landscape).  
Just as the screen orientation is changed, so is the  
functionality of both the softkeys and the navigation key.  
The Up/Down/Left/Right options of the navigation key  
are also adjusted when the phone changes from  
portrait to landscape modes.  
Softkey (right)  
Up  
Up  
Left  
Right Left  
Right  
Down  
Down  
QWERTY  
Softkey (left)  
Keyboard  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Entering Text Using the QWERTY  
Keyboard  
Space: Inserts an empty space.  
OK/Enter: Moves the insertion point to the  
In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter  
text using the QWERTY keyboard. Using your phone's  
QWERTY keyboard is just like using any standard  
computer keyboard.  
next line in a message.  
Back: Deletes the previous character,  
similar to the backspace key on a  
computer keyboard.  
Selecting text input modes and options in landscape  
mode is the same as in portrait mode (page 30).  
From any text entry screen, press Options  
Tip  
ᮣ
From a text entry screen, use the keyboard to enter  
different character types. Select one of the  
following character types:  
(right softkey) and select from the available options.  
Ⅲ Letters to enter the alphabetic characters  
associated with each key. (See page 37.)  
The following keys perform special functions when  
entering text:  
Ⅲ Numbers to enter numbers by pressing the  
numbers on the keyboard. (See page 37.)  
FN: Allows you to use characters  
displayed at the top of the QWERTY keys.  
Examples: $, @, #, !  
Ⅲ Symbols to enter symbols and “emoticons.” (See  
page 38.)  
Shift: Changes the text input mode among  
Upper/Lower/Mixed case mode.  
Ⅲ My Text to enter preprogrammed messages.  
(See page 38.)  
Sym: Launches the Symbols page.  
Choose from an extensive list of symbols  
and other character sets.  
The keyboard provides dual-use keys labeled with  
alphabetic characters on the lower half and numbers  
and symbols on the upper half. Press the key  
corresponding to the character you want to enter.  
36  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅲ To enter all uppercase characters, press  
before each letter.  
Entering Characters  
Entering Uppercase and Lowercase Letters  
1. Press  
to make the next character uppercase.  
Characters revert back to lowercase after the next  
character is typed.  
Ⅲ Pressing  
cycles through the input modes  
(Upper/Lower/Mixed).  
B I L L  
2. Press the corresponding text keys.  
Ⅲ For example, to enter the word “Bill,” type the  
keypad sequence below. If you make a mistake,  
Entering Numbers  
press  
to erase a single character.  
The keyboard can be used to enter numbers, letters,  
and symbols. Although these keys default to text  
Ⅲ Press and hold  
entered text.  
to erase all previously  
(letters), numbers can be input by using  
conjunction with the correct number key.  
in  
1. Press  
to input the character on the top row of  
the next key pressed.  
2. Press the corresponding keys. (For example, to  
enter “9:30,” you would use the keyboard  
B
i
l
l
sequence shown below. If you make a mistake,  
2A. Phone Basics  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
press  
hold  
to erase a single character. Press and  
to erase an entire word.)  
2. Press  
and press the number key  
corresponding to the desired symbol to highlight a  
symbol and then insert it.  
9:30  
Entering Symbols and Preset Messages  
Symbols can be entered from the keyboard by using  
Ted’s/files  
the  
key to access the Symbols page and then  
pressing the number key corresponding to an  
associated symbol.  
To enter preset messages:  
From a screen where you can enter text, press OPTIONS  
(right softkey) > Add Preset Message. (See “Setting Text  
Options” on page 33.)  
To enter symbols:  
1. Position the cursor where you want the symbol to  
appear within your message.  
38  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Returning to Portrait Mode  
When you close the QWERTY keyboard, the display  
screen will remain in landscape mode until you open  
the other slider keypad.  
ⅷ The above action converts display screen contents  
back to portrait mode.  
2A. Phone Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
 
The Sprint One Click Main Screen  
2B. Navigating the  
Main Screen  
Bubbles  
Tiles  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Getting to Know Sprint One Click (page 40)  
Personalizing the Carousel (page 42)  
Personalizing the Home Screen (page 45)  
Carousel  
Navigation  
Key  
Getting to Know Sprint One Click  
Menu/OK  
Key  
Sprint One Click brings all your favorite features to your  
fingertips. Instead of navigating through the levels of a  
traditional phone menu, this design puts the things you  
need the most – features like text messaging, Internet  
access, and GPS navigation – right up front. Not only  
can you access what you need right away, you get to  
choose what and where it all goes.  
Left  
Softkey  
Right  
Softkey  
The illustration above shows the basic layout of your  
phone’s main screen, also known as the standby  
screen. The callouts highlight what you’ll need to know  
to get started with Sprint One Click.  
Using the Sprint One Click main screen is easy once  
you’ve learned a few basics.  
40  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ⅷ Carousel – The carousel is the bottom row of tiles, or  
icons, on your main screen. Pressing the navigation  
key left or right moves the carousel. The tile in the  
center is the selected tile, and it’s menu is displayed.  
Ⅲ Menu/OK key (  
menu items. From the Home (  
press to display the phone’s full menu.  
(When in landscape mode, the Enter/OK key  
performs these functions.)  
): Press to select highlighted  
) screen,  
In the illustration, the Home tile (  
) is in the center,  
so the Home screen is displayed.  
Ⅲ Softkeys: Press the left or right softkey to perform  
the action or access the menu indicated by the  
text directly above it on the display. In the  
illustration, pressing the left softkey displays  
Options, and pressing the right softkey displays  
Contacts.  
ⅷ Tiles – The tiles are the individual icons on the  
carousel. Each tile displays a specific menu, such as  
Messaging, Internet, and Call Log. The carousel can  
hold up to 15 tiles, which you can add, remove, and  
rearrange to suit your needs. The Home tile (  
)
provides access to the phone’s full menu, and it is  
the only one that cannot be moved or removed.  
Ⅲ End/Power key (  
menu or tile to return to the Home (  
- not pictured): Press from any  
) screen.  
ⅷ Bubbles – Bubbles are at-a-glance information items  
that you may see when the Home screen is  
displayed, such as in the illustration. Your Home  
screen can display up to eight bubbles.  
Take the Tutorial  
Your phone has a built-in menu of tutorials to teach  
you all you need to know about Sprint One Click.  
ⅷ Function Keys – The keys you’ll use to navigate  
through the main screen are:  
1. Highlight  
Tutorial.  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Ⅲ Navigation key: Press left or right to move the  
carousel and select tiles. Selected tiles occupy  
the center position. Press the navigation key up or  
down to highlight bubbles (Home screen only) or  
menu items.  
– or –  
Select  
(Personalize My Phone) > Tutorial.  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Highlight a topic and press  
to display the  
3. To add the tile, press ADD (left softkey) or  
press . (To view a preview, press PREVIEW  
[right softkey].)  
tutorial.  
Ⅲ Topics include: Getting Started, Changing the  
Carousel, Adding a Tile, Removing a Tile, Changing  
the Home Screen, Adding a Bubble, and Removing a  
Bubble.  
Tile categories and available tiles are continually  
Note  
being updated, and there are dozens of tiles to  
choose from. The following table shows a sampling  
of the default tiles that may be preloaded on your  
phone.  
To see a full menu of tutorials when viewing another  
tutorial, press Index (left softkey).  
Tip  
Sprint One Click Tiles  
Personalizing the Carousel  
Home – View Home screen and bubbles.  
Press  
to access the phone’s full menu.  
Now that you know what the carousel is, it’s time to make  
it work for you by adding, removing, or rearranging tiles to  
match how you want to use your phone. You have 44 tiles  
to choose from.  
Messaging – Access Voicemail, Send Message,  
Text Message, Picture Mail, and Email. See “3A.  
Sprint Service: The Basics” on page 132.  
My Account – Access links to Account Details  
Web page, Hear Minutes, and Hear Balance.  
See “Exploring the Web” on page 155.  
Adding a Tile to the Carousel  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Carousel.  
Personalize My Phone – Access Change Screen  
Saver, Change Ringer, Personalize Home  
Screen, Personalize Carousel, and Tutorials. See  
“Personalizing Your Phone” on page 47.  
2. Press ADD TILE (left softkey), select a tile category  
(All, News & Sports, Communicate & Tools, Web &  
Communities, Entertainment & Games, or Money &  
Weather), and then highlight a tile.  
42  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sprint One Click Tiles  
Sprint One Click Tiles  
Internet – Access data services, including the  
Sprint home page, Favorites, Recent Pages, the  
Enter Web Address menu, and Google search.  
See “Getting Started With Data Services” on  
page 144.  
Music – Access the Music menu, including  
My Music, Sprint Music Store, and Search. See  
“3C. Entertainment: TV and Music” on page 161.  
Favorite Contacts – Select your five most favorite  
Contacts. See “2E. Contacts” on page 68.  
Shortcuts – Add and access up to five shortcuts  
from My Stuff, My Album, Bookmark, and Menu  
Item. See “Phone Setup Options” on page 59.  
Sprint TV – Easily access all of your favorite  
SprintTV content. See “3C. Entertainment: TV  
and Music” on page 161.  
Call Log – Access Recent History. See “2D.  
History” on page 65.  
Google – Get easy access to all your favorite  
Google services such as Google search, online  
Maps, Gmail™, and YouTube™. See “Launching  
Google via the Carousel” on page 155.  
Text Message – Instantly access the Text  
Message menu, including Send Text, Inbox, and  
a list of recent messages. See “Composing Text  
Messages” on page 135.  
MySpace – Access to your MySpace page. See  
“Launching MySpace via the Carousel” on  
page 155.  
Email – Access all your email accounts in one  
place. See “Accessing Messaging” on  
page 149.  
Facebook – Access your Facebook page and all  
your friends. See “Launching Facebook via the  
Carousel” on page 156.  
Sprint Navigation – Access Sprint Navigation,  
including Drive To, Directory, Maps & Traffic, and  
Tools/Extras. See “3D. GPS Navigation” on  
page 174.  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a Tile From the Carousel  
From the main screen, highlight a tile, press  
OPTIONS (left softkey) > Move Tile, and then  
complete step 3.  
Shortcut  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Carousel.  
Replacing Tiles on the Carousel  
2. Press the navigation key left or right to select a tile,  
and then highlight Remove Tile and press  
.
If your carousel is full or if you just want to swap out  
one tile for another, you can replace an existing tile with  
another.  
3. Highlight Yes and press to remove the tile.  
From the main screen, highlight a tile and  
press OPTIONS (left softkey) > Remove Tile.  
Remember that you cannot remove, move, or  
replace the Home tile.  
Shortcut  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Carousel.  
2. Press the navigation key left or right to select a tile,  
and then highlight Replace Tile and press  
.
Rearranging Tiles on the Carousel  
3. Select a tile category and then highlight a tile.  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Carousel.  
4. To replace the previous tile, press REPLACE (left  
softkey) or press to place the tile.  
2. Press the navigation key left or right to select a tile,  
and then highlight Move Tile and press  
.
From the main screen, highlight a tile, press  
OPTIONS (left softkey) > Replace Tile, and  
then complete steps 3 and 4.  
Shortcut  
3. Press the navigation key left or right to select a  
location, and then press INSERT (left softkey) or  
to place the tile.  
44  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Tiles  
Personalizing the Home Screen  
Certain tiles, such as Shortcuts, contain editable  
content. You can use the Personalize Carousel menu to  
edit these tiles.  
Use your Home screen (the screen that is displayed  
when the Home  
icon is highlighted) to provide at-  
a-glance information and updates through  
customizable bubbles. You can add up to eight  
bubbles to your Home screen.  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Carousel.  
2. Press the navigation key right or left to select a tile,  
To see more information from a bubble, press the  
navigation key up or down to highlight the bubble and  
scroll down the options list, highlight Edit Tile and  
press  
.
then press  
.
3. Use your navigation key and function keys to edit  
Adding a Bubble to the Home Screen  
the tile.  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey)>  
Personalize Home Screen.  
From the main screen, highlight a tile, press  
Options (left softkey) > Edit Tile, and then  
complete step 3.  
Shortcut  
2. Press ADD (left softkey) and then highlight a bubble  
(see table on page 42).  
Resetting the Carousel  
3. To add the bubble, press ADD (left softkey) or  
press  
To reset the carousel to the original default settings:  
. (To view a preview, press PREVIEW  
[right softkey].)  
1. Highlight  
Reset One Click.  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
2. Highlight Yes and press  
.
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
               
4. If prompted, follow the instructions to personalize  
your bubble (for example, by selecting an  
astrological sign for the Horoscope bubble).  
Removing a Bubble From the Home  
Screen  
1. Highlight  
and press OPTIONS (left softkey) >  
Personalize Home Screen.  
5. When you are finished, press  
.
Sprint One Click – Home Screen Bubbles  
2. Press the navigation key up or down to highlight a  
bubble.  
Date and Time – Provides the current date and  
time.  
3. Press the navigation key left or right to highlight the  
Remove Bubble option and then press  
.
Weather – Check out the current forecast in  
your city.  
News – Instantly access breaking news and top  
stories.  
Horoscope – View your daily horoscope.  
Finance – Track your favorite stocks.  
Sports News – Get breaking sports news.  
46  
2B. Navigating the Main Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Personalizing Your Phone  
2C. Settings  
Your phone can be personalized via the onscreen  
carousel.  
To change the Screen Saver:  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Personalizing Your Phone (page 47)  
Sound Settings (page 48)  
1. Highlight  
press  
> Change Screen Saver and  
.
Display Settings (page 52)  
2. Select Preset Images, My Stuff, or My Albums.  
Location Settings (page 54)  
Messaging Settings (page 55)  
Airplane Mode (page 57)  
3. Review images by using your navigation keys to  
scroll through and view available images.  
4. Press ASSIGN (left softkey) or press  
a selected image.  
to assign  
TTY Use With Sprint Service (page 58)  
Phone Setup Options (page 59)  
Security Settings (page 61)  
To change the Ringer:  
1. Highlight  
> Change Ringer and press  
.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions. See “Sound  
Settings” on page 48.  
2C. Settings  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Select a category (for example, Ring Tones,  
Melodies, My Stuff, or My Videos), and then use  
your navigation key to scroll through the available  
ringers. A sample ringer will sound as you  
highlight each option.  
Sound Settings  
Ringer Types  
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and  
messages. You can assign ringer types to individual  
Contacts entries, types of calls, and types of messages.  
4. Press  
to assign a ringer.  
Getting New Ringers  
ⅷ Downloaded Ringers can be downloaded right to your  
phone.  
A wide variety of new ringers is available from the  
Sprint Digital Lounge, and you can access them right  
from your phone. (Additional charges may apply, but  
some are free.)  
ⅷ Preprogrammed Ringers include a variety of standard  
ringer types and familiar music.  
ⅷ Vibrating Ringer alerts you to calls or messages  
without disturbing others.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> My Stuff > Ringers >  
Get New Ringers. (The browser starts and displays  
the Ringers menu.)  
Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls  
2. Use your navigation key and keypad to search  
Your phone provides a variety of ringer options that allow  
you to customize your ring and volume settings. These  
options allow you to identify incoming calls by the ring.  
through available ringers. When you find one you  
want, highlight it and press  
.
3. To make a purchase, highlight Buy and press  
. (Your phone automatically downloads the  
ringer.)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Ringer Type > Incoming Calls.  
> Settings > Sounds >  
2. Select Contacts Entries or Unknown Numbers. (A list of  
ringer type categories will be displayed.)  
48  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. When the download is finished, select an option to  
Selecting Ringer Types for Scheduled Events  
continue:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Ringer Type > Schedule.  
> Settings > Sounds >  
Ⅲ Listen to listen to the ringer.  
Ⅲ Set As to assign the ringer to a call or message  
type or to a specific contact.  
2. Select a category, and then use your navigation  
key ( ) to scroll through the available ringers. A  
sample ringer will sound as you highlight each  
option.  
Ⅲ Shop to browse for other items to download.  
Selecting Ringer Types for Messages  
3. Press  
to assign a ringer.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Ringer Type > Messages.  
> Settings > Sounds >  
Selecting Ringer Types for Roaming  
2. Select Voicemail, Text Message, or Picture Mail. (You  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Ringer Type > Roam Ringer.  
> Settings > Sounds >  
will see a list of ringer type categories.)  
3. Select a category, and then use your navigation  
key to scroll through the available ringers. You will  
hear a sample ringer as you highlight each option.  
2. Highlight Normal or Distinctive and press  
.
4. Press  
to assign a ringer.  
You can also assign ringers from the Contacts menu.  
See “Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry” on  
page 73.  
Note  
2C. Settings  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings  
Repeat these same processes to adjust the  
Applications > Volume and Game Vibration settings.  
Note  
Adjust your phone’s volume settings to suit your needs  
and your environment.  
3. Use the navigation key to select Use Ringer Volume  
(to use the ringer volume setting).  
1. Highlight  
Volume.  
and press  
> Settings > Sounds >  
– or –  
Use the navigation key to select Separate Volume  
(to use a volume setting that is different from the  
ringer volume setting).  
2. Select Ringer, Earpiece, Headset, Speakerphone, or  
Advanced....  
3. Using the navigation key, choose a volume level  
4. If you select Separate Volume, press VIBRATE  
(left softkey) if you wish the phone to vibrate in  
addition to ringing at the selected volume setting.  
and press  
.
You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode  
(or the earpiece volume during a call) by using the  
volume button on the left side of your phone.  
Tip  
5. Press  
to store your new settings.  
Vibrate  
Adjusting the Advanced Volume Settings  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making any sounds:  
Adjust your phone’s other advanced volume settings to  
suit your needs and your environment.  
ᮣ
Press the volume button down in standby mode  
until you see “Vibrate All” on the screen.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Sounds >  
Volume > Advanced....  
2. Highlight Alarm, Applications, Text Message, Picture  
Mail, or Voicemail and press  
.
50  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
To set your phone always to vibrate in addition to any ringer  
settings:  
Alert Notification  
Set your phone to alert you with an audible tone when  
you change service areas, once a minute during a  
voice call, or when a call has been connected.  
1. Press the volume button up or down in standby  
mode until a volume setting appears on the  
screen.  
1. Highlight  
Alerts.  
and press  
> Settings > Sounds >  
2. Press Always Vibrate (left softkey). (If you have  
already checked the option, pressing Always Vibrate  
(left softkey) again deselects the option.)  
2. Highlight Minute Beep, Service, Connect, Signal Fade/  
Call Drop, Power On, or Power Off and press  
.
Silence All  
3. Highlight On or Off and press  
.
The Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds  
without turning your phone off.  
Selecting a Key Tone  
Your phone offers a number of options for selecting the  
audible tones accompanying a keypress.  
To activate Silence All:  
ᮣ
Press and hold the volume button down in standby  
mode. (You will see “Silence All.”)  
1. Highlight  
Key Tone.  
and press  
> Settings > Sounds >  
To deactivate Silence All:  
2. Highlight an option and press  
.
ᮣ
Press the volume button up repeatedly to select a  
volume level.  
Ⅲ Tone Type to select the sound of a keypress.  
Ⅲ Tone Volume to select a keypress volume level.  
2C. Settings  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Ⅲ Tone Length to select a key tone length. (Longer  
tone lengths may be better for tone recognition  
when dialing voicemail or other automated  
systems.)  
Changing the Keypad Time Length  
Select how long the keypad remains backlit after any  
keypress is made.  
1. Highlight  
Keypad Light.  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
3. Highlight an available option from one of the above  
menus and press  
.
2. Select a time setting and press  
.
Display Settings  
Ⅲ Select Slide open, 30 seconds, 15 seconds, 8 seconds  
or Off.  
Changing the Backlight Time Length  
Long keypad settings reduce the battery’s talk and  
standby times.  
Note  
Select how long the display screen and keypad remain  
backlit after you press any key.  
Changing the Display Screen  
1. Highlight  
Backlight.  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
Choose what you see on the display screen while  
powering on or off and when in standby mode.  
2. Select a time setting and press  
.
1. Highlight  
and press  
Main Screen > Screen Saver.  
> Settings > Display >  
Ⅲ Select Slide open, 30 seconds, 15 seconds, or  
8 seconds.  
2. Highlight Get New Screen Savers, Preset Images,  
My Stuff, or My Albums and press  
Long backlight settings reduce the battery’s talk and  
standby times.  
Note  
.
52  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. Highlight an image and press  
to assign it.  
Activating the PowerSave Mode  
(You can use your navigation key to scroll through  
and view other available images.)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
PowerSave Mode.  
– or –  
2. Highlight On or Off, and press  
.
To make an online purchase, highlight Buy and  
press  
. (Your phone automatically downloads  
Changing the Phone’s Menu Style  
the ringer.) For more information on downloading  
images, see “Downloading Games, Ringers and  
More” on page 152.)  
Choose the layout of your phone’s menu.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
.
4. Press ASSIGN (left softkey) to assign an image.  
2. Press the left softkey to cycle thru the available  
menu styles.  
Changing the Brightness  
Ⅲ List View to display the menu as a list.  
Adjust your screen’s brightness (contrast) to suit your  
surroundings.  
Ⅲ Grid View to view the menu as a grid.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
Brightness.  
2. Press your navigation key left or right to adjust the  
screen brightness and press  
.
2C. Settings  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing the Phone’s Menu Orientation  
Location Settings  
Although the menu is displayed as a series of  
onscreen icons, the arrangement of these icons is  
dependent on the current viewing mode: portrait or  
landscape.  
Your phone is equipped with a Location feature for use  
in connection with location-based services.  
The Location feature allows the network to detect your  
position. Turning Location off will hide your location  
from everyone except 911.  
1. If the keypad is the currently active input source,  
the menu is displayed in portrait mode.  
– or –  
Turning Location on will allow the network to detect  
your position using GPS technology, making some  
Sprint applications and services easier to use.  
Turning Location off will disable the GPS location  
function for all purposes except 911, but will not hide  
your general location based on the cell site serving  
your call. No application or service may use your  
location without your request or permission.  
Note  
To display the menu in landscape mode, rotate the  
phone 90 degrees counter-clockwise.  
2. Slide the top section of the phone up to open.  
When you slide the phone open, the display  
rotates from a vertical viewing mode to a horizontal  
viewing mode.  
GPS-enhanced 911 is not available in all areas.  
Display Language  
To enable your phone’s Location feature:  
and press > Settings > More... >  
You can choose to display your phone’s onscreen  
menus in English or in Spanish.  
1. Highlight  
Location. (The Location disclaimer will be  
displayed.)  
1. Highlight  
Language.  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
2. Read the disclaimer and press  
.
2. Highlight English or Español and press  
.
3. Highlight On or Off and press  
.
54  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
When you turn the Location feature on, the phone  
displays the icon. When you turn Location off, the  
phone displays the icon.  
To access the Messaging Settings menu, you can  
Tip  
also highlight  
and press  
> Messages >  
Settings.  
Adding a Customized Signature  
Messaging Settings  
Add a customized signature to each message you  
send.  
Your phone’s advanced messaging capabilities let you  
send and receive many different kinds of text  
messages without placing a voice call. (For more  
information, see “Accessing Messaging” on page 149.)  
1. Highlight  
> Signature.  
and press  
> Settings > Messages  
2. Read the onscreen message, highlight On and  
press . (If you do not wish to attach a  
signature, select Off.)  
Messaging settings allow you to decide how you would  
like to be notified of new messages, create a signature  
with each sent message, and create your own preset  
messages.  
3. Enter a signature and press  
. (See “Entering  
Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text  
in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
Setting Message Notification  
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you  
by displaying an icon on your display screen. You can  
also choose to be notified with a message notification  
on your display screen.  
Managing Preset Messages  
Your phone is loaded with 20 preset messages to help  
make sending text messages easier. Customize or  
delete these messages, such as “Where are you?,”  
“Let’s get lunch,” and “Meet me at” to suit your needs,  
or add your own messages to the list.  
1. Highlight  
> Notification.  
and press  
> Settings > Messages  
2. Select Message & Icon or Icon Only.  
2C. Settings  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To edit or delete a preset message:  
1. Highlight and press  
Other Text Message Settings  
> Settings > Messages  
> Pre-set Message. (You will see the list of preset  
These settings allow you to configure the options  
associated with a text message sent from your phone.  
These options include:  
messages.)  
ⅷ Callback Number - allows you to set the callback  
number for the recipient to view when receiving a  
text message.  
2. Highlight the message and press EDIT (left softkey)  
to edit the message (see “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34), and press  
.
To activate a callback number:  
– or –  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Messages > Callback Number.  
> Settings >  
Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Delete to delete the  
message. (Select Delete All to delete all current  
preset messages.)  
2. Select None, <current number>, or Other.  
To add a new preset message:  
Voice SMS Options  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Messages  
These settings allow you to configure the settings that  
are used when sending SMS Voice messages to  
others. These options include:  
> Pre-set Message. (You will see the list of preset  
messages. You can store up to 20 messages.)  
ⅷ Speakerphone - allows you to turn the speakerphone  
on or off for recording SMS Voice messages.  
2. To add a new message, press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Add New.  
ⅷ From Name - allows you to enter the name that will be  
displayed to the recipient of an SMS Voice message.  
3. Enter your message (see “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34), and press  
. (Your new  
message will be added to the beginning of the list.)  
56  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To turn speakerphone on or off:  
1. Highlight and press  
Airplane Mode  
> Settings >  
Messages > Voice SMS Option > Speakerphone.  
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your phone’s  
features, such as Games, Notepad, and Voice Memos,  
when you are in an airplane or in any other area where  
making or receiving calls or data is prohibited. When  
you set your phone to Airplane Mode, it cannot send or  
receive any calls or access online information.  
2. Select On or Off.  
To access the VoiceSMS Options menu, you can  
also press Menu > Messages > Settings >  
VoiceSMS Option.  
Tip  
1. Highlight  
Airplane Mode.  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
To enter the from name:  
1. Highlight and press  
> Settings >  
Messages > Voice SMS Option > From Name.  
2. Read the disclaimer and press  
.
3. Highlight On, Off, or On PowerUp and press  
.
2. Enter the desired name using either the keypad or  
keyboard and press  
softkey).  
or select DONE (left  
While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s standby screen  
will display “Phone off.”  
2C. Settings  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To turn TTY Mode on or off:  
1. Highlight and press  
TTY Use With Sprint Service  
> Settings > More... >  
Accessibility > TTY Options. (An informational  
A TTY (teletypewriter, also known as a TDD or Text  
Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows  
people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or who have  
speech or language disabilities, to communicate by  
telephone.  
message will be displayed.)  
2. Read the informational message and press  
.
Select TTY Full, TTY + Hear, TTY+ Talk, or TTY Off and  
press  
.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices.  
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device  
to ensure that it supports digital wireless transmission.  
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special  
cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this  
cable was not provided with your TTY device, contact  
your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the  
connector cable.  
911 Emergency Calling  
WARNING  
Sprint recommends that TTY users make  
emergency calls by other means, including  
Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS),  
analog cellular, and landline communications.  
Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted  
when received by public safety answering  
points (PSAPs), rendering some  
communications unintelligible. The problem  
encountered appears related to TTY  
equipment or software used by PSAPs. This  
matter has been brought to the attention of  
the FCC, and the wireless industry and the  
PSAP community are currently working to  
resolve this.  
When establishing your Sprint service, please call  
Sprint Customer Service via the state  
Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first  
dialing  
.
58  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To create a new shortcut:  
1. Select > Add Shortcut and press  
In TTY Mode, your phone will display the TTY access  
icon.  
Note  
.
When enabled, TTY mode may impair the audio  
quality of non-TTY devices connected to the headset  
jack.  
2. Select from one of the following categories:  
My Stuff, My Album, Bookmark, or Menu Item.  
3. Press ASSIGN (left softkey) to make the new  
shortcut assignment.  
Phone Setup Options  
Call Answer Mode  
Select how to answer incoming calls on your phone:  
Main Screen  
whether you want to press  
key.  
or to press any number  
Your phone’s Sprint One Click main screen lets you  
customize your phone and provides quick access to the  
features and functions you use the most. See  
“Personalizing the Carousel” on page 42 and  
“Personalizing the Home Screen” on page 45 for details.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Call Setup > Call Answer.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Highlight an option and press  
.
Ⅲ Any Key to allow you to answer an incoming call  
1. Select  
to access the Shortcuts menu.  
by pressing any key except  
(right softkey).  
or IGNORE  
to answer all  
2. Using the navigation key, select a current shortcut  
and press  
.
Ⅲ Talk Key to require you to press  
incoming calls.  
3. Press  
to return to standby mode.  
2C. Settings  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Ⅲ Slide Up to allow you to answer an incoming call  
by either sliding the phone open or by pressing  
.
Setting Abbreviated Dialing  
To activate the Contacts Match feature:  
You can continue an active conversation with your  
party even if the phone is closed (cover slides down)  
when either Any Key or Talk Key options are  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Call Setup > Contacts Match.  
> Settings > More... >  
Note  
2. Select On or Off.  
selected. Press  
to end the call.  
To activate the Prepend feature:  
If Slide Up is selected as a Call Answer option,  
sliding the cover down ends the call.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Call Setup > Abbreviated Dial.  
> Settings > More... >  
Auto Answer Mode  
2. Select On.  
Set your phone to automatically pick up incoming calls  
when connected to an optional hands-free car kit.  
3. Enter the first five- or six-digit prefix in the Abbrev.  
Dial field and then press  
.
1. Highlight  
and press  
Call Setup > Auto Answer.  
> Settings > More... >  
Ⅲ To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 2  
above.  
2. Highlight an option and press  
Ⅲ No to disable Auto-Answer.  
.
To make an Abbreviated Dial call, see “Abbreviated  
Dialing” on page 28.  
Tip  
Ⅲ Yes to answer calls automatically when the phone  
is connected to a hands-free car kit or a headset  
(sold separately). Remember, your phone will  
answer calls in Auto-Answer mode even if you  
are not present.  
This setting does not apply to 911 or Sprint 411.  
Note  
60  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1. Highlight  
and press  
Restrict and Lock > Lock my Phone.  
> Settings > More... >  
Security Settings  
2. Enter your new lock code and press  
3. Highlight a lock option (On Power-Up or Lock Now)  
and press . (To set your phone to lock the  
.
Accessing the Security Menu  
All of your phone’s security settings are available  
through the Security menu. You must enter your lock  
code to view the Security menu.  
next time it is turned on, select On Power-Up.)  
Unlocking Your Phone  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More...>  
Security.  
1. From standby mode, press UNLOCK (left softkey) to  
display the User Lock screen.  
2. Enter your lock code to display the Security menu.  
2. Enter your lock code.  
If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last  
four digits of your wireless phone number. If this  
doesn’t work, call Sprint Customer Service at  
1-888-211-4727.  
Tip  
Changing the Lock Code  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Security and enter your lock code.  
> Settings > More...>  
Your Phone’s Lock Feature  
2. Select Change Lock, enter your new lock code and  
press NEXT (left softkey).  
Locking Your Phone  
3. Re-enter your new lock code and press DONE  
(left softkey).  
When your phone is locked, you can only receive  
incoming calls or make calls to 911, Sprint Customer  
Service, or special numbers. (See “Special Numbers”  
on page 62.)  
2C. Settings  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Highlight a location (1 - 3) for your entry and  
press  
Calling in Lock Mode  
.
You can place calls to 911 and to your special  
numbers when in lock mode. (For information on  
special numbers, see “Special Numbers” on page 62.)  
4. Enter the number and press  
.
There are no speed dial options associated with  
special numbers.  
Note  
ᮣ
To call an emergency number, special number, or  
Sprint Customer Service, enter the phone number  
Erasing Phone Content  
and press  
.
Use the Security menu to quickly erase all the content  
you have created or stored in your phone.  
Special Numbers  
Special numbers are important numbers that you have  
designated as being “always available.” You can call  
and receive calls from special numbers even if your  
phone is locked.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Security and enter your lock code.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Select Erase/Reset.  
3. Select an option:  
Ⅲ Erase Web Cookies to erase all web tracking  
You can save up to three special numbers in addition  
to your Contacts entries (the same number may be in  
both directories).  
cookies.  
Ⅲ Erase Web History to erase the history of your  
recently visited web sites.  
To add or replace a special number:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Security and enter your lock code.  
> Settings > More...>  
Ⅲ Erase Web Cache to erase any temporarily  
downloaded web files.  
2. Select Special #.  
Ⅲ Erase Contacts to erase the contents of your  
Contacts list.  
62  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Ⅲ Erase My Stuff to erase all the content you have  
downloaded to your phone.  
2. Select Erase/Reset > Reset Picture Account.  
3. Read the disclaimer and select Yes.  
Ⅲ Erase Pic/Video to erase all pictures and videos  
Resetting Your Phone Settings  
stored on your phone.  
Ⅲ Erase Messages to erase all stored messages.  
Resetting the default settings restores all the default  
settings to your phone without deleting any data you  
have entered, such as entries to your Contacts list. The  
Contacts, history, Scheduler, and Messaging are not  
affected.  
Ⅲ Reset Picture Account to reset any previously  
configured picture account settings.  
Ⅲ Reset Shortcuts to reset the list of previously  
created shortcuts from the carousel.  
Ⅲ Default Settings to reset the phone to its default  
settings, but keep any current data on the phone.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Security and enter your lock code.  
2. Select Erase/Reset > Default Settings.  
3. Read the disclaimer, highlight Yes, and press  
4. Select Yes again to confirm.  
Ⅲ Reset Phone to reset the phone to its factory  
settings and erase all data.  
.
4. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
Resetting Your Picture Account  
Resetting your picture account settings clears the  
account settings and you will need to register your  
picture account again before you can use it.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Security and enter your lock code.  
> Settings > More... >  
2C. Settings  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
these services. While signed out, you can still place or  
receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other  
voice services. You may enable data services again at  
any time.  
Resetting Your Phone  
Resetting the phone restores all the factory defaults,  
including the ringer types and display settings.  
Resetting your phone deletes all files that you  
have previously downloaded.  
WARNING  
To disable data services:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Data > On/Off. (A message is displayed.)  
Security and enter your lock code.  
2. Select NEXT(left softkey) > Disable Vision to confirm  
that you want to sign out and deactivate data.  
2. Select Erase/Reset > Reset Phone. (You will see a  
disclaimer.)  
To enable data services:  
3. Read the disclaimer, press OK (left softkey), and  
then select Yes.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Data > On/Off. (A message is displayed.)  
4. If you are then sure you want all data erased and  
the phone reset to its factory default state, then  
select Yes.  
2. Select Yes to enable data service and connect to  
the network.  
Security Features for Data Services  
Enabling and Disabling Data Services  
You can disable data services without turning off your  
phone; however, you will not have access to all data  
services, including Web and messaging. Disabling  
data services will avoid any charges associated with  
64  
2C. Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is  
available) and Contacts entry name (if the number is in  
your Contacts). Duplicate calls (same number and type  
of call) may only appear once on the list.  
2D. History  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> History.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Viewing History (page 65)  
2. Highlight an entry and press  
.
History Options (page 66)  
You can also press  
from standby mode  
Shortcut  
Note  
to display your recent calls.  
Making a Call From History (page 66)  
Saving a Number From History (page 66)  
Erasing History (page 67)  
You may also be able to access History from your  
phone’s main screen carousel. See 2B. Navigating  
the Main Screen (page 40) for details.  
Viewing History  
History records only calls that occur while the phone  
is turned on. If a call is received while your phone is  
turned off, it will not be included in history.  
History is a list of the last 240 phone numbers (or  
Contacts entries) for calls you placed (10 per entry),  
accepted, or missed. History makes redialing a number  
fast and easy. It is continually updated as your phone  
automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of  
the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom  
of the list.  
If you return a call from the voicemail menu, it will be  
included in your phone’s history.  
2D. History  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
History Options  
Making a Call From History  
Highlight a History entry from the Recent History screen  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> History.  
and press  
to display the date and time of the call,  
2. Highlight an entry and press  
.
the phone number (if available), and the caller’s name  
(if the number is already in your Contacts).  
Press  
from the main screen to also bring up the  
Tip  
Recent History screen where you can then select an  
entry.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> History, highlight  
an entry from the Recent History screen.  
You cannot make calls from History to entries  
identified as Blocked ID, Unknown or Restricted.  
Note  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) to display the  
following options:  
Ⅲ New Group to save the current history entry to a  
new group.  
Saving a Number From History  
Ⅲ Save to save the number if it is not already in your  
Contacts. (See “Saving a Number From History”  
on page 66.)  
Your phone can store up to 600 contact entries in total,  
with each contact entry containing a maximum of  
seven phone numbers for a total phone book capacity  
of 4200 numbers, and each entry’s name can contain  
64 characters.  
Ⅲ Contact Details to display the Contact entries’  
details.  
Ⅲ Delete to delete the entry.  
1. Highlight a new History entry and press OPTIONS  
(right softkey) > Save.  
Ⅲ Delete All to delete all History entries.  
You can also view the next History entry by pressing  
the navigation key right or view the previous entry by  
pressing the navigation key left.  
Tip  
66  
2D. History  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Select New Entry to create a new Contacts entry for  
the number or Existing Entry to save the number to  
an existing entry.  
Erasing History  
To erase individual History entries, see “History  
Options” on page 66.  
3. Highlight a label (such as Mobile, Home, Work, Pager,  
Fax, or Others) and press  
.
1. Highlight  
and press  
> History.  
4. Use either the keypad or keyboard to type in the  
2. Highlight an entry and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Delete.  
new entry name.  
– or –  
Ⅲ To delete all History entries, select Delete All.  
Highlight an existing Contacts entry and  
3. If you are certain you want to erase the History  
press  
.
entry, select DELETE (left softkey).  
5. Make any other selection or entries for this new  
– or –  
Contact.  
Press CANCEL (right softkey) to return to the  
previous menu.  
6. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the new entry to  
your Contacts list and exit.  
After you have saved the number, your phone displays  
the new Contacts entry. (See “Contacts Entry Options”  
on page 69.)  
You cannot save phone numbers already in your  
Contacts or from calls identified as Blocked ID or  
Restricted.  
Note  
2D. History  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adding a New Contacts Entry  
2E. Contacts  
Your phone can store up to 600 contact entries in total,  
with each contact entry containing a maximum of  
seven phone numbers for a total phone book capacity  
of 4200 numbers, and each entry’s name can contain  
64 characters.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Adding a New Contacts Entry (page 68)  
Saving a Phone Number (page 69)  
Contacts Entry Options (page 69)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts > Add New.  
Editing a Contacts Entry (page 70)  
Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry (page 70)  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Numbers (page 71)  
Deleting a Contact (page 71)  
Enter the phone number in standby mode  
and press Options (right softkey) > Save.  
Proceed with “Saving a Phone Number” on  
page 69.  
Shortcut  
2. Select New Contact to create a new Contacts entry.  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers (page 71)  
Adding a New Group (page 73)  
3. Enter a name for the new entry and press the  
navigation key down. (See “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34.)  
Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry (page 73)  
Assigning a Picture to an Entry (page 74)  
Finding Contacts Entries (page 74)  
Secret Contacts Entries (page 75)  
Dialing Sprint Services (page 76)  
4. Enter the phone number for the entry and  
press  
.
5. Highlight a label for the entry (Mobile, Home, Work,  
Pager, Fax, or Others) and press  
.
Wireless Backup (page 76)  
68  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Press DONE (left softkey).  
4. Use the keypad to enter the new contact name.  
– or –  
After saving the number, your phone displays the new  
entry. (See “Contacts Entry Options” on page 69.)  
Search for an existing contact name and press  
to save the new number.  
ICE – In Case of Emergency  
Tip  
To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify  
important contacts, you can list your local  
emergency contacts under “ICE” in your phone’s  
Contacts list. For example, if your mother is your  
primary emergency contact, list her as “ICE–Mom” in  
your Contacts. To list more than one emergency  
contact, use “ICE1–___,” “ICE2–___,” etc.  
5. Press DONE (left softkey).  
Contacts Entry Options  
To display a Contacts entry:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts.  
Saving a Phone Number  
2. Highlight an entry and press  
.
You can view the next entry by pressing the  
navigation key right or view the previous entry by  
pressing the navigation key left.  
Tip  
To save a number from standby mode:  
1. Enter a phone number and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Save.  
2. Highlight New Entry or Existing Entry and press  
.
3. Highlight a label and press  
.
2E. Contacts  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To access a Contacts entry’s options:  
Editing a Contacts Entry  
ᮣ
Highlight an entry and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Edit Contact. Highlight an option and  
1. Highlight a Contacts entry (see “Contacts Entry  
Options” on page 69) and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Edit Contact.  
press  
.
ⅷ <Contact Image> to edit the image associated with the  
contact entry.  
2. Highlight the information you wish to edit (Name,  
Group, Ringer, etc.) and press  
.
ⅷ <Contact Name> to edit the contact entry name.  
ⅷ <Current number> to edit the entry phone number.  
(See “Editing a Contacts Entry’s Numbers” on  
page 71.)  
3. Add or edit the information and press  
.
Ⅲ Press  
and hold  
to clear one digit at a time, or press  
to erase the entire number.  
ⅷ <Add Number> to add a phone number to the entry.  
(See “Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry” on  
page 70.)  
4. Press DONE (left softkey) to save your changes.  
Adding a Number to a Contacts  
Entry  
ⅷ <E-mail> to add an email address to the entry.  
ⅷ <IM> to add an Instant Messenger address to the  
entry.  
1. Highlight a Contacts entry. (See “Contacts Entry  
Options” on page 69.)  
ⅷ <URL> to add a Web site’s URL to the entry.  
ⅷ <Memo> to add a note, street address, or other  
information.  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Edit Contact > [Add  
Number].  
ⅷ <Ring> to assign a preprogrammed or downloaded  
ringer.  
70  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Enter the new phone number and press  
4. Highlight a label for the number (Mobile, Home,  
Work, Pager, Fax or Others) and press  
.
Deleting a Contact  
.
1. Highlight a Contacts entry. (See page 74.)  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Delete Contact.  
3. Press DELETE (left softkey) to confirm the deletion.  
5. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the new number.  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Numbers  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers  
1. Display a Contacts entry (see page 69) and press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Edit Contact.  
Your phone can store up to 98 phone numbers in  
speed dial locations. (For details on how to make calls  
using speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialing” on  
page 29.)  
2. Highlight a number and edit the number.  
3. Press  
and hold  
to clear one digit at a time, or press  
to erase the entire number.  
You can assign speed dial numbers when you add a  
new Contacts entry, when you add a new phone  
number to an existing entry, or when you edit an  
existing number.  
4. Re-enter or edit the number and press  
5. Highlight a label for the number and press  
6. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the number.  
.
.
To assign a speed dial number to a new phone number:  
1. Add a phone number to a new or to an existing  
Contacts entry. (See “Adding a New Contacts  
Entry” on page 68 or “Adding a Number to a  
Contacts Entry” on page 70.)  
2E. Contacts  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2. Highlight the recently added number and press  
Finding Speed Dial Numbers  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Set Speed Dial.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts > OPTIONS  
3. Select an available (unassigned) speed dial  
location and press ASSIGN (left softkey) or  
(right softkey) > Settings > Speed Numbers.  
2. Scroll through speed dial entries. Speed dial  
numbers are displayed in numeric order.  
press  
.
To assign a speed dial number to an existing phone  
number:  
– or –  
Enter the number of a speed dial location using  
your keypad.  
1. Select a Contacts entry (see page 69).  
2. Highlight the desired number (from the Contact  
Details page) and press OPTIONS (right softkey) >  
Set Speed Dial.  
Speed Dial location 1 is reserved for voicemail  
access.  
Note  
3. To display an entry, highlight it and press  
.
3. Select an available speed dial location (or enter a  
location using your keypad) and press ASSIGN  
4. To dial the entry’s default phone number,  
press  
.
(left softkey) or press  
.
If you attempt to assign an already in-use speed dial  
location to a new phone number, you will need to  
manually replace the existing speed dial assignment.  
Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Replace to assign  
the location to the new phone number and delete  
the previous speed dial assignment.  
Note  
72  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Press SAVE (left softkey) to assign the selected  
entries to the new group.  
Adding a New Group  
Groups allow you to communicate simultaneously by  
sending out a broadcast text message to every  
member of a current group.  
Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry  
Assign a ringer type to a Contacts entry so you can  
identify the caller by the ringer type. (See “Ringer  
Types” on page 48.)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts.  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > New Group to create  
a new Group category.  
1. Display a Contacts entry and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Edit Contact.  
3. Read the onscreen information and press START  
(left softkey).  
2. Highlight the current ring type and press  
display the Select Ringer menu.  
to  
4. Add multiple entries (two or more) to your new  
group by highlighting a name from the list and  
3. Select a ringer type, such as Get New Ringers,  
Default Ringer, Download Ringers, Other Ringers, My  
Videos, or No Ringer.  
pressing  
. This action places a check mark  
alongside the name.  
If several numbers are saved within a single Contacts  
entry, you can select from these additional numbers  
by using the left or right navigation keys.  
Note  
4. Scroll through available ringers. (To hear a sample  
ringer, highlight a ringer type.)  
5. Highlight a ringer and press  
.
5. Press CONTINUE (left softkey) and enter a name for  
the new group. (See “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34.)  
6. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the new ringer type.  
2E. Contacts  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6. Press DONE (left softkey) to complete the process.  
Assigning a Picture to an Entry  
Finding Contacts Entries  
Assign a picture to display each time a certain contact  
calls you.  
Finding Contacts by Name  
1. Display a Contacts entry information and press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Edit Contact.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts.  
2. Highlight the current image or picture type and  
press ADD (right softkey) to display the Photo ID  
menu.  
– or –  
Press CONTACTS (right softkey).  
2. Scroll through all the entries.  
3. Select an option, such as Get New Screen Savers,  
None, New Picture, My Albums, or Screen Savers.  
– or –  
Enter the first letter or letters of a name (such as  
“dav” for “Dave”). (The more letters you enter, the  
more your search narrows.)  
4. Highlight a picture and press  
twice to assign  
it.  
Ⅲ If you selected New Picture, the camera will launch  
and you will use it to take a new picture. (See “2I.  
Camera” on page 105 for details.)  
3. To display an entry, highlight it and press  
.
4. To dial the entry’s default phone number,  
press  
.
Ⅲ If you selected My Albums, you may need to select  
In Phone, Memory Card, or Online Albums to find the  
picture.  
– or –  
To display additional Contacts entries, press the  
navigation key ( ) up or down and press  
5. Press ASSIGN (left softkey) to save the assigned  
picture.  
.
74  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Secret Contacts Entries  
From standby mode, press CONTACTS (right  
softkey) to display the Search feature.  
Shortcut  
Making an entry secret hides its phone number(s). The  
name is still displayed, but the phone numbers and  
other information are replaced with “(SECRET).”  
Finding Group Entries  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Contacts and  
Adjusting your secret settings:  
scroll through the group  
titles. These group entries  
are listed alphabetically  
and are associated to a  
different onscreen icon  
than individual Contacts.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Contacts > Hide Secret.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Enter your user lock code. The entry now reads  
Show if all Hidden entries are hid once Set as  
Secret.  
2. To display which  
Contacts entries belong  
to a select group,  
To make Seceret entries visible, adjust the device’s  
secret settings to 'Show Secret' in Settings > More..  
> Contacts > Show Secret.  
Note  
highlight the group entry  
To make an entry secret:  
and press  
3. To dial an entry’s phone number, select the entry  
and press  
.
1. Highlight a Contacts entry and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Set as Secret.  
.
2. Press  
to mark the entry as secret.  
2E. Contacts  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To make an entry public:  
To dial a service from standby mode using your keypad:  
1. Highlight a Contacts entry and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey)> Set as NOT Secret.  
ᮣ
Dial the appropriate service number:  
Ⅲ Account Info. –  
2. Press  
secret).  
to now set the entry as public (not  
Ⅲ Customer Service –  
Ⅲ Sprint 411 –  
Ⅲ Sprint Operator –  
Dialing Sprint Services  
Wireless Backup  
Your Contacts list is preprogrammed with contact  
numbers for various Sprint services.  
This feature allows you to back up all of your contacts  
to the Sprint website and restore them if your phone is  
lost, stolen, damaged, or replaced.  
To dial a service from your Contacts:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
highlight an entry.  
> Contacts and  
To use the wireless backup service, you are required  
to activate the service from your phone.  
Tip  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Settings > Services  
and select an available service, such as Sprint  
Wireless Account Information, Sprint Customer Service,  
Sprint DIrectory Assistance (Sprint 411), Sprint Operator,  
Pay Bill, Voicemail, Community Information, Non-  
Emergency Services, Traffic Information, Carrier Repair  
Service, TRS Relay for TTY, or Call Before You Dig.  
To subscribe to the wireless backup service, you must  
purchase a license to use the service through your  
phone’s browser. The license expires after a set period  
of time and you must renew it regularly. As part of the  
initial subscription process, the service generates a  
random wireless backup password. The service sends  
the password to your phone as a text message.  
76  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To deactivate the wireless backup service:  
and press > Settings > More... >  
Activating and Deactivating Wireless Backup  
1. Highlight  
To activate the wireless backup service:  
Wireless Backup > Unsubscribe. (A message is  
displayed.)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Wireless Backup > SUBSCRIBE (left softkey). (You are  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to unsubscribe  
from the wireless backup service.  
prompted to confirm your license status.)  
2. Press YES (left softkey) and follow the onscreen  
You can unsubscribe from the wireless backup  
service only through the Sprint website.  
Note  
instructions to purchase the license.  
3. Please wait while registering the license. (You will  
see a confirmation screen once registration is  
complete.)  
Once you have completed the registration, you will  
receive a text message with your password. This  
password is required for the Wireless Backup website  
(www.wirelessbackup.sprint.com) in order to edit  
your contacts from your computer.  
Note  
Tip  
Each time you edit Contacts on your phone, they are  
backed up at www.wirelessbackup.sprint.com.  
2E. Contacts  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Your Wireless Backup Status  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Wireless Backup > View Status.  
Setting the Wireless Backup Alert  
This feature turns the pop-up alert on or off when a  
wireless backup update has been completed.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Wireless Backup > Alerts.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Select Alert me or No alerts.  
To display the wireless backup information, highlight  
and press > Settings > More... > Wireless  
Tip  
Backup > Learn More. When the service is available,  
you can also select Troubleshoot to display the  
troubleshooting guide.  
78  
2E. Contacts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calendar  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Your Calendar helps you organize your time and  
reminds you of important events. With your Samsung  
Exclaim™, you can separate calendar entries into either  
Personal Calendar or Work Calendar. The Work Calendar  
entry and maintenance requires that you first setup  
Work email to synchronize with your OWA (Outlook®  
Web Access). See “Accessing Messaging” on  
page 149.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Calendar (page 79)  
File Manager (page 86)  
Alarm Clock (page 87)  
Memo Pad (page 88)  
Calculator (page 89)  
Ⅲ During the configuration and set up of Work  
email, your Calendar events and Business  
Contacts are synchronized with your device.  
Tip Calculator (page 89)  
World Time (page 89)  
Updating Your Phone (page 90)  
Updating the PRL (page 90)  
Ⅲ Personal Calendar entries are setup and  
managed manually.  
Adding an Event to the Personal Calendar  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Personal Calendar > Scheduler.  
> Tools > Calendar >  
2. Highlight the day to which you would like to add an  
event and press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Add New.  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
               
Ⅲ Using your keypad or navigation key, set the start  
and end times for the event and press  
Press the navigation key up or down to scroll by  
week through the Scheduler.  
Tip  
.
Ⅲ Change the AM/PM entry by pressing AM/PM  
(right softkey).  
3. Enter the event title and press NEXT (left softkey).  
(See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or  
“Entering Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
9. Select a single optional contact for the event by  
highlighting go to Contacts and pressing  
.
4. Select a category for the event by highlighting the  
category field:  
Ⅲ Highlight a contact from the list and press  
check the box. Press DONE (left softkey).  
to  
Ⅲ Select Appointment, Personal, Business, Birthday, or  
Vacation.  
10. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the event.  
5. Select an alarm time for the event by highlighting  
the alarm field:  
Event Alert Menu  
When your phone is turned on and you have an event  
alarm scheduled, your phone alerts you and displays  
the event summary. There are several ways your phone  
alerts you to scheduled events:  
Ⅲ Select No Alarm, On Time, 10min before, 30min before,  
or 1 Hr before.  
6. Highlight a recurrence cycle for the event:  
ⅷ By playing the assigned ringer type.  
ⅷ By illuminating the backlight.  
Ⅲ Select Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
7. Highlight the ringer field and press  
Ⅲ Highlight a ringer category and then a ringer and  
press  
.
ⅷ By flashing the LED (adjacent to the Speaker).  
.
To silence the alarm and reset/edit the schedule,  
press  
.
8. Select a Start and End time for the event by  
highlighting the time field and pressing  
.
80  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To view additional options, press the appropriate  
softkey:  
Editing an Event  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Personal Calendar > Scheduler.  
> Tools > Calendar >  
ⅷ DISMISS (right softkey) ignores the event.  
ⅷ SNOOZE (left softkey) silences the alarm and  
schedules it to replay again in 10 minutes.  
2. Highlight the day containing the previously created  
event and press . (Days containing an event  
are indicated within a red box.)  
Viewing Events  
3. Highlight the event from the Schedule tab listing  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Personal Calendar > Scheduler.  
> Tools > Calendar >  
and press  
.
4. Press EDIT (left softkey). Follow the onscreen  
procedures to alter any of the previously  
configured fields. See “Adding an Event to the  
Personal Calendar” on page 79.  
2. Highlight the day for which you would like to view  
events and press  
. (Your phone lists events in  
chronological order.)  
In the calendar view, days with events scheduled are  
outlined.  
Tip  
5. Press DONE (left softkey) to store any updates.  
3. To display an event’s details, highlight it and  
press  
Erasing a Day’s Events  
.
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
Going to the Current Day’s Calendar Menu  
Personal Calendar > Scheduler.  
2. Highlight the day for which you would like to erase  
events and press  
ᮣ
Highlight  
Personal Calendar > Today.  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
.
In the scheduler view, days with events scheduled  
are outlined.  
Tip  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Press OPTIONS > Delete All.  
Erasing All Events  
4. Select Yes or No.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
Personal Calendar > Scheduler > Options > Delete All.  
Erasing a Single Event  
2. Select Yes to erase all events or No to return to the  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
calendar view and press  
.
Personal Calendar > Scheduler.  
Managing the Task List  
2. Select the day for which you would like to erase  
the single event and press  
.
This option allows you to manage daily tasks that  
include dates, times, and priority levels.  
In the scheduler view, days with events scheduled  
are outlined in red.  
Tip  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Personal Calendar > Task List.  
> Tools > Calendar >  
3. Highlight the event from the Schedule tab list and  
press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Delete.  
If there are no tasks saved, the New Task screen is  
automatically displayed.  
Note  
4. Select Yes or No.  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Add New.  
– or –  
Press ADD NEW (left softkey).  
82  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Enter the task name using either the keypad or  
Creating a Countdown  
keyboard and press NEXT (left softkey).  
This option allows you to enter a timer that counts  
down to an event based on a date and time specified.  
4. Select a priority level by highlighting the Priority  
field.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
Ⅲ Press the navigation key left or right to select Low  
or High.  
Personal Calendar > Countdown.  
If there are no countdowns saved, the New  
Countdown screen is automatically displayed.  
Note  
5. Select a due time by highlighting the Due Time field.  
Ⅲ Using your keypad and/or navigation key, set the  
alarm time.  
2. Press ADD NEW (left softkey).  
Ⅲ Change the AM/PM entry by pressing AM/PM  
(right softkey).  
3. Enter the countdown name using either the  
keypad or keyboard and press NEXT (left softkey).  
6. Select a due date by highlighting the Due Date field.  
4. Select a time by highlighting the Time field.  
Ⅲ Using your keypad and/or navigation key, set the  
date.  
Ⅲ Using your keypad and/or navigation key, enter  
the time of the countdown.  
Ⅲ Change the AM/PM entry by pressing AM/PM  
(right softkey).  
7. Press DONE (left softkey) to save and exit.  
5. Select a date by highlighting the Date field.  
Ⅲ Using the keypad, enter the date of the  
countdown.  
6. Press DONE (left softkey) to save and exit.  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing the Work Calendar  
Selecting a Date from the Work Calendar  
The Work Calendar entries  
are maintained automatically  
by synchronizing with your  
currently configured Outlook®  
work email account  
information. As you change  
and update your events via  
your Outlook application,  
those changes are then  
automatically updated within  
your device’s Work Calendar  
page.  
1. Highlight  
Work Calendar.  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
2. Press the left or right navigation keys (adjacent to  
the date description) to select the day you wish to  
view.  
– or –  
Press Menu (right softkey), highlighting an option  
and pressing  
Ⅲ Select Next Day, Previous Day, or Monthly View and  
press  
:
.
Adding an Event to the Work Calendar  
Use of this feature requires that you first setup Work  
email to synchronize with your OWA (Outlook® Web  
Access). See “Accessing Messaging” on page 149.  
1. Highlight  
Work Calendar.  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
Ⅲ During the configuration and setup of Work email,  
your Calendar events and Business Contacts are  
synchronized with your device.  
2. Press the left or right navigation keys to select the  
day to which you would like to add an event and  
press New Event (left softkey).  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
Work Calendar.  
84  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3. Select an optional contact for the event by  
highlighting the To field, pressing  
6. Select a alarm time for the event by highlighting  
the Reminder field and pressing .:  
Ⅲ Select On Time, 30min before, 1 hour before, 1 day  
.
Ⅲ Scroll through the available Outlook contacts to  
find those you wish to add.  
before, or No Alarm and press  
.
Ⅲ Once you have found the Contact, press  
.
Ⅲ Press Next (left softkey).  
Ⅲ Repeat this process for all Contacts you wish to  
enter.  
7. Highlight a recurrence cycle for the event:  
Ⅲ Select Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
Ⅲ Press Done (right softkey) to end your selection  
process and return to the previous screen.  
8. Press Save (left softkey) to save the new event and  
notify your recipients.  
4. Enter the event Title, and Location then press Next  
(left softkey). (See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode”  
on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape Mode”  
on page 34.)  
Editing a Work Calendar Event  
1. Highlight  
Work Calendar.  
and press  
> Tools > Calendar >  
5. Select a Start and End time for the event by  
2. Select the day containing the previously created  
event.  
highlighting the time field and pressing  
.
Ⅲ Using your keypad or navigation key, set the start  
and end times for the event and press  
3. Highlight the event from the listing and press  
.
.
Ⅲ Change the time and am/pm entries by pressing  
4. Press Menu (right softkey) > Edit Appointment.  
and using the Navigation keys up or down.  
5. If displayed, read the onscreen warning about  
modification to this single event, highlight OK and  
press  
.
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
   
6. Alter any of the previously configured fields. See  
“Adding an Event to the Work Calendar” on  
page 84.  
Opening Files in File Manager  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Mass  
Storage > File Manager > Phone or Memory Card.  
7. Press Save (left softkey) to store any updates.  
2. Highlight a folder and press  
.
.
File Manager  
3. Highlight an item and press  
File Manager Options  
File Manager allows you to manage files such as  
pictures, videos, music, and applications stored in your  
phone or on the microSD card. (See “Connecting Your  
Phone to Your Computer” on page 103.)  
When viewing files or folders in File Manager, highlight  
a file and press OPTIONS (right softkey) to display  
available options. Highlight an option and press  
to select it.  
Accessing File Manager  
ⅷ Send to send the currently selected file via either  
Email or Bluetooth.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Storage > File Manager.  
> Tools > Mass  
ⅷ Delete to delete a file or folder from File Manager.  
2. Highlight an option and press  
.
ⅷ Rename to change the name of a selected file.  
Ⅲ Phone to access files stored in your phone’s  
memory.  
ⅷ Create Folder to create a new subfolder within the  
current location. (See “Creating Folders in the  
microSD Card” on page 102.)  
Ⅲ Memory Card to access files stored on the microSD  
card.  
ⅷ Sort to sort folder contents by Name, Date, or Type.  
86  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ⅷ Copy to copy a file from the current folder to another  
folder location such as Phone (or Memory Card),  
Card Album, File Storage, or Media.  
Ⅲ Change the AM/PM entry by pressing AM/PM  
(right softkey).  
5. Select a ringer type for the alarm by highlighting  
ⅷ Move to move a file from the current folder to another  
folder location such as Phone (or Memory Card),  
Card Album, File Storage, or Media.  
the ringer field and pressing  
.
Ⅲ Highlight and available ringer category and press  
. Choose from either: Get New Ringers, Ring  
Tones, Melodies, or My Stuff.  
ⅷ Find to search for a file within the current folder  
location.  
6. Select a repeating status for the alarm by  
highlighting the repeat field and pressing your  
navigation key left or right.  
Alarm Clock  
Ⅲ Choose either: Daily, Once, Mon to Fri, or Sat & Sun.  
Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock that has  
multiple alarm capabilities.  
7. Select a snooze interval for the alarm by  
highlighting the snooze interval field and pressing  
your navigation key left or right.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Alarm.  
Ⅲ Choose either: Off, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes,  
or 20 minutes.  
2. Select Alarm #1, Alarm #2, or Alarm #3.  
3. Turn the alarm on or off by highlighting the Alarm  
activation field and pressing the navigation key left  
or right.  
8. Press DONE (left softkey) to save and exit.  
4. Select a time for the alarm by highlighting the Time  
field.  
Ⅲ Using your keypad and/or navigation key, set the  
alarm time.  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
   
To edit a note:  
Memo Pad  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Memo Pad.  
Your phone comes with a notepad that you can use to  
compose and store reminders and notes to help keep  
you organized.  
2. Highlight a note and press  
.
3. Press EDIT (left softkey).  
4. Press  
to erase a single character. Press and  
to erase an entire word.  
To compose a note:  
hold  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Memo Pad.  
5. Type your note using either the keypad or  
keyboard and press  
(See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or  
“Entering Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
If there are no memos saved, (None) appears on the  
screen.  
Note  
or DONE (left softkey).  
2. Press ADD NEW (left softkey).  
To delete all saved notes:  
3. Type your note using either the keypad or  
keyboard and press  
or DONE (left softkey).  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Memo Pad.  
(See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or  
“Entering Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
2. Highlight a note and press OPTIONS (right softkey)  
> Delete All. (An alert will be displayed notifying you  
that you are about to erase all memos.)  
To read a saved note:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Memo Pad.  
3. Select Yes or No.  
2. Highlight a note and press  
.
88  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To delete an individual saved note:  
1. Highlight and press  
Tip Calculator  
> Tools > Memo Pad.  
1. Highlight  
Calculator.  
and press  
> Tools > Tip  
2. Select a note and press OPTIONS (right softkey) >  
Delete.  
2. Use your keypad/keyboard and navigation key to  
enter the bill amount and tip percentage. (The  
application instantly calculates the correct tip.)  
3. Select Yes or No.  
Calculator  
3. If you’re splitting the check, highlight # paying and  
enter the number of people in your party. (The  
application calculates and displays an equal split.)  
Your phone comes with a built-in calculator.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Calculator.  
World Time  
2. Enter numbers using your keypad.  
Ⅲ Press  
to enter decimal points.  
To view the time in over 50 different locations:  
Ⅲ Press  
to change the sign from positive to  
negative.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > World Time.  
Ⅲ Press CLEAR (right softkey) to clear all numbers.  
3. Press for the total.  
2. Press the navigation key left or right to scroll  
through different cities and time zones.  
3. Press SET DST (left softkey) to turn daylight saving  
time on or off.  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Updating Your Phone  
Updating the PRL  
The update phone option allows you to download and  
update the software in your phone automatically. Only  
the internal software is updated; no Contacts entries or  
other information saved to your phone will be deleted.  
This option allows you to download and update the  
PRL (preferred roaming list) automatically.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Update  
Phone > Update PRL.  
To download software updates to your phone:  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Phone > Update Firmware.  
> Tools > Update  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions. (Your phone  
automatically downloads and installs any available  
updates. You may be required to power your  
phone off and back on to complete the software  
upgrade.)  
90  
2F. Calendar and Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
want to use. To complete your task, simply follow the  
voice prompts.  
2G. Voice Services  
Available ASR commands include:  
ⅷ Call <Name or #> to call an entry in your Contacts  
list or a spoken phone number. (See “Making a  
Voice Call With ASR” on page 92.)  
ࡗ
ࡗ
Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) (page 91)  
Managing Voice Memos (page 97)  
ⅷ Send Text <Name or #> to launch text messaging on  
your phone and specify a recipient for a new  
message. (See “Send a Text Message” on page 95.)  
Automatic Speech Recognition  
(ASR)  
ⅷ Send Picture <Name or #> to launch picture  
messaging on your phone and specify a recipient for  
a new picture mail message. (See “Send a Picture  
Mail Message” on page 95.)  
You can use your phone’s built-in automatic speech  
recognition (ASR) software to dial a phone number in  
your Contacts or to launch phone functions. All you  
have to do is to talk into the phone, and ASR will  
recognize your voice and complete tasks by itself.  
ⅷ Send Voice SMS <Name or #> to launch SMS  
messaging on your phone and specify a recipient for  
a new SMS message. (See “Recording Voice  
Memos” on page 97.)  
ⅷ Lookup <Name> to lookup a Contacts entry name  
from your current list of available contacts. (See  
“Look Up a Contacts Entry” on page 97.)  
Activating ASR  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
or  
.
ⅷ Go To <menu> to jump directly to menu items or  
applications. (See “Opening Menus With ASR” on  
page 92.)  
The screen displays “Say a command” and the phone  
prompts you to say the name of the command you  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
           
ⅷ Check <item> to check your phone’s status. (See  
“Checking Phone Status Using ASR” on page 93.)  
Again?” and then return you to the previous  
screen.  
Use ASR in a quiet environment so it can accurately  
recognize your commands.  
4. If you hear “Say the name or number,” say a name  
or a phone number.  
Tip  
5. If you hear “Which location?,” say a number type  
(for example, “Mobile”).  
When you display a Command menu, say “More  
options” to display additional commands.  
You can skip steps 3 and 4 by saying a name and  
location after “Call” without pausing (for example,  
“Call John Jones mobile”).  
During ASR operation, press Help (left softkey) to get  
instructions using the software.  
Tip  
Tips for Using Voice Dial  
ⅷ Voice Dial works best in quieter environments.  
If ASR does not recognize the name or number, it will  
find the most likely matches and display a list of up  
to three names or numbers. You will hear “Did you  
say…” followed by the name or number. You can  
confirm by saying “Yes.” Say “No” to change the  
selection.  
Note  
ⅷ When saying a name, speak at a normal speed and  
say the name clearly. There is no need to pause  
between the first name and last name.  
Making a Voice Call With ASR  
Opening Menus With ASR  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
You can jump directly to many menu items or  
applications by saying “Go to” followed by a menu  
option.  
2. If you hear “Say a command,” say “Call.”  
3. If the location is not recognized or the name does  
not have a number stored in Contacts, your phone  
will play the message “No match found, Try  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. If you hear “Say a command,” say “Go To.”  
92  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. If you hear “Which shortcut?,” say an application  
Adapting Digit Dialing  
name (for example, “Messages”).  
Digit Dialing is speaker independent, which means that  
no training or adaptation is required. Some users with  
heavy accents or unusual voice characteristics may  
find difficulty in achieving high accuracy with speaker-  
independent Digit Dialing, so the Adapt Digits feature  
allows users to dramatically improve the digit accuracy  
through adaptation. Users who get acceptable digit  
recognition accuracy will find no additional benefit to  
performing the Adapt Digit adaptation.  
4. The phone opens the selected menu.  
Say “More options” to display additional commands.  
Tip  
Checking Phone Status Using ASR  
You can use ASR to obtain information about your  
phone:  
ⅷ Status (all of the previous except My Phone Number)  
ⅷ Time  
ⅷ Signal Strength  
ⅷ Network  
After you adapt Digit Dial, your phone will be  
customized to your voice. Other people will not be able  
to use Digit Dial on your phone unless they reset the  
phone to factory defaults.  
ⅷ Battery  
ⅷ My Phone Number  
ONLY adapt Digit Dial if the system is frequently  
misrecognizing your speech. You can always restore  
the system to its original factory setting.  
Note  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. If you hear “Say a command,” say “Check.”  
Adaptation involves recording several digit sequences  
to teach the system your voice. The adaptation process  
takes about three minutes.  
3. If you hear “Which status item?,” say a command.  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
 
To adapt the system to your voice:  
1. Press and hold or  
Tips for Adapting Digit Dial  
ⅷ Adapt digits in a quiet place.  
.
ⅷ Make sure you wait for the beep before starting to  
speak.  
2. Press SETTINGS (right softkey) > Adaptation >  
Adapt Voice.  
ⅷ Speak clearly, but say each digit sequence naturally.  
3. Press START (left softkey), wait for the beep, and  
then repeat the words, commands, and digits  
using a normal tone of voice.  
ⅷ If you make a mistake while recording a sequence of  
digits, or if there is an unexpected noise that spoils  
the recording, you can say or select “No” when the  
prompt asks, “Did the recording sound OK?” You will  
then be prompted to rerecord the sequence.  
Ⅲ If the recording is not acceptable, the device will  
ask you to repeat the last phrase.  
4. When you are finished with a full session, you will  
reach a screen that reads, “Adapting.”  
ASR Options  
5. Press  
to complete the process.  
To change ASR confirmation:  
It is recommended that you perform the complete  
adaptation of Digit Dial at least once to achieve the  
maximum benefit of this feature. If a partial  
adaptation is performed, you should repeat the  
process from the beginning.  
Note  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. Press SETTINGS (right softkey) > Confirmation and  
select an option.  
Ⅲ Automatic to ask for confirmation only when the  
system is not sure what you said.  
Ⅲ Always Confirm to always ask for confirmation.  
Ⅲ Never Confirm to never ask for confirmation.  
3. Press  
to complete the process.  
94  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reset the adaptation:  
2. Say “Send Text” followed immediately by the name  
of a person in your Contacts list and, optionally, the  
type of number (Mobile1, Home1, etc.) you want to  
send it to. For example, say “Send Text John Smith  
Mobile1.”  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. Press SETTINGS (right softkey) > Adaptation >  
Reset Voice > Yes (left softkey).  
If you do not specify the number type and there are  
multiple numbers for the name, your phone chooses  
the mobile number by default.  
Reset Voice is available only after the phone has  
undergone an adaptation session.  
Note  
To change the ASR mode:  
If you say “Send Text” without specifying a recipient, your  
phone prompts you with “Say the name or number.”  
Say the name of a person in your Contacts list and,  
optionally, the type of number.  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. Press SETTINGS (right softkey) > Audio Modes and  
select an option.  
Ⅲ Expert Mode to sound a beep only.  
3. Use either the keypad or keyboard to enter text and  
press CONTINUE (left softkey).  
Ⅲ Prompt Mode to prompt for required information.  
4. Press SEND (left softkey) to complete the process.  
Send a Text Message  
Send a Picture Mail Message  
Use automatic speech recognition to launch text  
messaging on your phone and specify a recipient for  
the message.  
Use a single voice command to launch a new Picture  
Mail message where the phone begins the address  
process and then locates a picture for attachment.  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
   
To send a Picture Mail message using ASR:  
1. Press and hold or  
7. To include a text message, scroll to the Text field  
and press . Enter your message using either  
your keypad or keyboard (or press Options [right  
.
softkey] to select from Preset Msg or Recent Msg)  
2. Say “Send Picture” followed immediately by the  
name of a person in your Contacts list and,  
optionally, the type of number (Mobile1, Home1, etc.)  
you want to send it to. For example, say “Send  
Picture John Smith Mobile1.”  
and press  
. (See “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34.)  
8. To include an audio message with the picture,  
highlight the box next to Audio and press  
.
3. Use the navigation key to select a Picture Mail  
image location:  
Ⅲ Press RECORD (left softkey) or press  
recording. (Maximum recording time is 10  
seconds.)  
to start  
Ⅲ Choose from either: In Phone, Memory Card, Online  
Albums, Take New Picture, Take New Video, or Text Only  
and press  
.
Ⅲ Press DONE (left softkey) to end the recording and  
return to the Picture Mail message.  
4. Highlight a picture you wish to send and press  
. (The check box on the upper left corner will  
be marked. You can select multiple pictures.)  
9. Press SEND (left softkey). For more information, see  
“Sending Sprint Picture Mail” on page 115.  
5. Press NEXT (left softkey).  
6. To include a subject, scroll to Subject and press  
. Enter your subject using either the keypad or  
keyboard and press NEXT (left softkey) to save and  
exit.  
96  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Look Up a Contacts Entry  
Managing Voice Memos  
Look up and display contact information for any person  
stored in your Contacts list by saying “Contacts”  
followed by the name.  
Use your phone’s Voice Services to record brief  
memos to remind you of important events, phone  
numbers, or grocery list items.  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
Recording Voice Memos  
2. Say “Lookup John Smith.” The entry information for  
the specified contact is then displayed.  
To record a voice memo from the main menu:  
If you say only “Lookup” your phone prompts you with  
“Say the name.”  
1. Highlight  
> Record.  
and press  
> Tools > Voice Memo  
Launch an Application  
2. Begin recording after the prompt.  
To end the recording of your memo:  
Open an application or access a menu by saying “Go  
To” followed by the name of the application or menu.  
ᮣ
Press  
or FINISH (right softkey).  
To see a list of possible choices:  
To record a conversation during a phone call:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
ᮣ
During a call, press OPTIONS (right softkey) >  
Voice Memo. (A one-minute counter [ ] is  
displayed on the screen indicating the amount of  
time a single voice memo can be recorded.)  
2. Say “Go To” by itself. A list of valid choices is  
displayed and you are prompted with “which  
shortcut?” You can say the name of a destination,  
or say “More Options” to view the next screen.  
Only incoming audio is recorded when Voice Memo  
is selected during a call.  
Note  
2G. Voice Services  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To end the recording of your conversation:  
Voice Memos recorded from a direct phone  
conversation are shown in the list with the phone  
number used during the recording process and an  
adjacent phone icon.  
Note  
ᮣ
To pause the recording, press PAUSE (let softkey).  
To resume the recording, press RESUME (left  
softkey).  
– or –  
Deleting Voice Memos  
To finish recording, press FINISH (right softkey).  
To delete an individual memo:  
A total of 10 one-minute memos can be recorded  
and saved.  
Note  
1. Highlight  
> Review.  
and press  
> Tools > Voice Memo  
Playing Voice Memos  
2. Highlight the desired memo to erase and press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Delete.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Voice  
Memo.  
3. Select Yes.  
2. Highlight Review and press  
displays a list of saved memos, with the first one  
selected.)  
. (The phone  
To delete all voice memos:  
1. Select  
and press  
Review > Options > Delete All.  
> Tools > Voice Memo >  
3. Highlight the desired memo and press  
.
2. Select Yes.  
– or –  
The Delete All option only appears when there are  
two or more voice memos stored on the phone.  
Note  
Press the number corresponding to the memo you  
want to review.  
98  
2G. Voice Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the memo with the  
new caption text.  
Editing a Voice Memo Caption  
By default, the caption assigned to a voice memo is a  
sequential file name which consists of the date  
(Month_Day) followed by the memo number. For  
example, two memos recorded on February 2, 2009,  
would be listed as: Feb_02x1 and Feb_02x2. These file  
names (captions) can be changed.  
Viewing the Information for a Voice Memo  
1. Highlight  
Memo.  
and press  
> Tools > Voice  
2. Highlight Review and press  
.
In the case of a Voice Memo recorded from a direct  
phone conversation, the filename consists of the  
phone number used during the recording process.  
Note:  
3. Highlight the desired memo and press OPTIONS  
(right softkey) > Info.  
To edit a voice memo caption:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Voice  
Memo.  
2. Highlight Review and press  
. (The phone  
displays a list of saved memos, with the first one  
selected.)  
3. Highlight the desired memo to erase and press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > Edit Caption.  
4. Press  
to delete the previous text and then  
use either the keypad or keyboard to enter a new  
caption for the selected memo.  
2G. Voice Services  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing the microSD Card  
1. Locate the microSD card slot on the right side of  
the phone.  
2H. microSD Card  
2. Flip open the microSD card slot cover.  
3. With the gold contact pins facing downward,  
carefully insert the microSD card into the opening  
and firmly push it in until you hear a click  
indicating the card is securely installed.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Your Phone’s microSD Card and Adapter (page 100)  
microSD Card Settings (page 101)  
microSD Folders (page 102)  
Connecting Your Phone to Your Computer (page 103)  
Your Phone’s microSD Card and  
Adapter  
The microSD Card  
Your phone is equipped with a 512 MB microSDTM  
(Secure Digital) memory card to expand the phone’s  
available memory space. It allows you to store images,  
videos, music, and voice data in your phone.  
Memory cards with over 32GB of storage capacity  
have not been tested on this device.  
Note  
100  
2H. microSD Card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Be sure to use only recommended microSD cards  
(up to 32GB). Using non-recommended microSD  
cards could cause data loss and damage your  
phone.  
DO NOT remove a microSD card while files are being  
accessed or transferred. Doing so will result in loss or  
damage of data.  
Note  
Note  
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using  
the microSD card. Your data may become damaged  
or unusable if the battery runs out while using the  
microSD card.  
Replacing the microSD Card  
1. Repeat steps 1 - 2 from “Removing the microSD  
Card” on page 100.  
microSD Card Settings  
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it.  
The card should pop partially out of the slot.  
3. Remove the card from the slot.  
Viewing Memory in the microSD Card  
4. Replace the microSD card cover and cover the  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Mass  
open slot.  
Storage > Memory Info. > Card. (The used and  
available memory space will be displayed.)  
You can easily damage the microSD card and its  
adapter by improper operation. Please be careful  
when inserting, removing, or handling them.  
Note  
2H. microSD Card  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Formatting the microSD Card  
microSD Folders  
Formatting a microSD card permanently removes all  
files stored on the card.  
Displaying Your microSD Folders  
1. With the microSD card inserted, highlight  
and  
All the files stored in your microSD are accessible  
through your microSD card folders.  
press  
> Tools > Mass Storage > Format Memory  
Card.  
1. With the microSD card inserted, highlight  
and  
2. Enter your lock code and press  
will be displayed.)  
. (A warning  
press  
> Tools > Mass Storage > File Manager >  
Memory Card.  
3. Press FORMAT (left softkey) to remove all the files  
2. Highlight a folder and press  
.
from your microSD card.  
3. To view or play a file, select it or the appropriate  
softkey.  
The formatting procedure erases all the data on the  
microSD card, after which the files CANNOT be  
retrieved. To prevent the loss of important data,  
please check the contents before you format the  
card.  
Note  
For information on file and folder options available  
through File Manager, see “File Manager” on  
page 86.  
Note  
Creating Folders in the microSD Card  
The following steps allow your phone to create folders  
for storing files in your microSD card using only the File  
Manager.  
102  
2H. microSD Card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Highlight  
and press  
Storage > File Manager > Memory Card.  
> Tools > Mass  
1. With the phone turned on, plug one end of a  
compatible USB cable into the phone's  
Charger/Accessories Jack.  
2. Select Options > Create Folder.  
2. Connect the other end of the cable to your  
computer and turn the phone on.  
3. Enter a name for the new folder. (See “Entering  
Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text  
in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
Charge Indicator  
4. Press DONE (left softkey) to save the new folder  
onto the card.  
Connecting Your Phone to Your  
Computer  
Before using your phone’s mass storage capabilities,  
you need to prepare your phone’s data services to  
synchronize with your desktop or laptop computer.  
Once the phone is connected to the computer, you can  
transfer your data to or from the microSD card.  
No driver is needed for Windows 98 or XP. Other  
operating systems may require a USB driver that can  
be downloaded from www.samsungwireless.com/  
usbdownload.  
Note  
2H. microSD Card  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. With the microSD card inserted, highlight  
and  
ⅷ To avoid loss of data, DO NOT remove the USB  
cable, the microSD card, or the battery while files are  
being accessed or transferred.  
press > Tools > Mass Storage > Connect to PC.  
(Wait for the connection to be completed. When  
connected, the host computer will automatically  
detect your phone.)  
ⅷ DO NOT use your computer to change or edit folder  
or file names on the microSD card, and do not  
attempt to transfer large amounts of data from the  
computer to the microSD card. Doing so may cause  
the microSD card to fail.  
During this connection via the USB port, you will be  
unable to use your phone to make or receive calls.  
Note  
To remove the connection:  
ⅷ DO NOT turn off or restart your computer, or put it  
into standby mode, while using a mass storage  
device. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.  
ᮣ
When you have finished transferring data, click the  
USB device icon on your computer’s taskbar, and  
follow the onscreen instructions to safely unplug  
the USB cable.  
ⅷ While you are connected to the computer, your  
phone’s screen will display “Phone Off.” You cannot  
make or receive calls.  
– or –  
ⅷ If you connect a mass storage device to a peripheral  
device, your device may not work properly.  
Press DISCONNECT (right softkey) > DISCONNECT  
(left softkey).  
Important Connection Information  
ⅷ No driver installation is required for Windows 2000/  
ME/XP/Vista users. If you use Windows 98/98SE, you  
have to download and install the USB Mass Storage  
Driver from the Sprint website at www.sprint.com.  
104  
2H. microSD Card  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taking Pictures  
2I. Camera  
Taking pictures with your phone’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and  
pressing a button.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Taking Pictures (page 105)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Photos > Camera to  
Recording Videos (page 111)  
activate camera mode. (Additional camera options  
are available through the camera mode Options  
menu. See “Camera Mode Options” on page 108  
for more information.)  
Storing Pictures and Videos (page 113)  
Sending Sprint Picture Mail (page 115)  
Managing Sprint Picture Mail (page 117)  
Printing Pictures Using PictBridge (page 122)  
Order Prints (page 123)  
To activate camera mode, you can also press  
and hold the side camera button. (See  
illustration on page 8.)  
Shortcut  
Settings and Info (page 124)  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a  
viewfinder, aim the camera lens at your subject.  
3. Press Capture (left softkey) or  
until the shutter  
sounds. (The picture will automatically be saved in  
your selected storage area.)  
Ⅲ To return to camera mode to take another picture,  
press  
.
2I. Camera  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Ⅲ Upload to upload the picture you just took to the  
Sprint Picture Mail Web site (www.sprint.com/  
picturemail). Depending on your settings, you may  
be prompted to accept a data connection.  
Zoom  
Image Saved  
Status  
0
01  
Ⅲ Assign to assign the picture as a Picture ID or  
Screen Saver.  
Ⅲ Erase to delete the picture you just took.  
Ⅲ Order Prints to upload your image to a third party  
service that will then provide hard copy prints.  
Display  
Image  
Ⅲ Post to Service to upload your image to a third party  
online service.  
Ⅲ Review Album to go to the My Albums folder where  
you can review your saved pictures.  
Assigning Pictures  
Camera  
Options  
Capture  
Capture  
Options  
After taking a picture, assign it as a screen saver or as  
a picture ID for a contact.  
4. Once you’ve taken your picture, press Options (right  
1. Take a picture. (See steps 1–3 on page 105.)  
softkey) for more options:  
Ⅲ Send Pic/Video to send the picture to up to 10  
contacts at one time. (See page 115 for details.)  
Ⅲ Camera Mode to return to the camera to take  
additional pictures.  
106  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. With the picture displayed, press Options (right  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Photos > My Albums  
softkey) > Assign, and select an option.  
> Online Albums. (You will be prompted to register  
your Sprint Picture Mail account.)  
Ⅲ Picture ID to assign the picture to a Contacts entry.  
Highlight an entry and press ASSIGN (left softkey)  
to assign the picture.  
If your Sprint service plan does not include Sprint  
Picture Mail, you will first be prompted to subscribe to  
the service for an additional monthly charge.  
Note  
Ⅲ Screen Saver to assign the picture as a screen  
saver. Press  
to assign the picture.  
2. If you are asked to connect, follow the onscreen  
procedures to Connect, turn data On and press  
. (Follow any registration prompts and  
complete your connection.)  
You can also assign pictures from the My Albums  
menu. See “In Phone Folder and microSD Card  
Options” on page 114.  
Tip  
3. Enter a password for your Picture Mail account and  
Registering Your Sprint Picture Mail  
Account  
press  
. (You will be prompted to confirm your  
password.)  
4. Please wait while the system creates your account.  
The first time you use any of the picture management  
options involving the Sprint Picture Mail Web site, you  
will be prompted to register your Sprint Picture Mail  
account and establish a password through your phone.  
This password will also allow you to sign in to the  
Sprint Picture Mail Web site at www.sprint.com/picturemail  
to access and manage your uploaded pictures and  
albums.  
Write down your Sprint Picture Mail password and  
keep it in a secure place.  
Tip  
Once you have received confirmation that your account  
has been successfully registered, you may upload and  
share pictures and access the Sprint Picture Mail Web  
site.  
2I. Camera  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ⅲ White Balance to adjust white balance based on  
changing conditions (Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten,  
Fluorescent, or Manual). (The default setting is Auto.)  
Camera Mode Options  
When the phone is in camera mode, press Options  
(right softkey) to display additional camera options:  
Ⅲ Night Shot to activate low light image capture.  
Enabling this feature allows you to take better  
quality photos in low light conditions.  
ⅷ Selftimer to activate the camera’s timer. (See “Setting  
the Selftimer” on page 108 for details.)  
ⅷ Multi Shot to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ Metering to allow the phone to sample the area  
being photographed and then determine the best  
light levels. Choose from either Spot (a specific  
area of the image) or Average (the entire image is  
sampled and then an average reading is used).  
Ⅲ Series Shot to take multiple shots. (See “Taking  
Multiple Shots” on page 109.)  
Ⅲ Divided Shot to take up to 16 images (4, 9, or 16)  
that are then combined into a single picture.  
ⅷ Settings.. to select Resolution, Quality, Shutter Sound,  
Status Bar or Storage. (See page 110 for details.)  
ⅷ Fun Tools.. to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ Fun Frames to select your favorite fun picture frame  
to decorate your picture.  
ⅷ Launch to review pictures or launch the camcorder.  
(The default setting is None.)  
Setting the Selftimer  
Ⅲ Color Tones to select a wide variety of color tones  
for the picture. (The default setting is None.)  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey) >  
Selftimer.  
ⅷ Controls.. to select an option from Brightness, White  
Balance, Night Shot, or Metering.  
2. Highlight the length of delay you want the timer to  
use (5 Sec or 10 Sec) and press  
(The default setting is Off.)  
.
Ⅲ Brightness to adjust the image brightness level.  
Press the navigation key up (increase) or down  
(decrease) to select a setting.  
(The default setting is 0.)  
108  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Press  
when you are ready to start the timer.  
2. Select one of the following options and  
press  
(The timer is displayed at the right of the display  
screen during the self-timer countdown.)  
:
Ⅲ Off to deactivate the multiple shots option.  
Ⅲ 3 to take a series of three pictures.  
Ⅲ 5 to take a series of five pictures.  
Ⅲ 10 to take a series of ten pictures.  
4. Get ready for the picture. (The phone will begin to  
beep for each second of the countdown. When the  
timer is down to three seconds, the outer LED will  
go from blinking green to blinking red just before  
the picture is taken.)  
3. Press Capture (left softkey),  
button to take the pictures.  
, or the camera  
To cancel the selftimer after it has started:  
To shoot a series of combined pictures:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey) >  
Multi Shot > Divided Shot.  
While the selftimer is active, all keys are disabled  
except Back.  
Note  
Once selected, resolution is changed to 320.  
Note  
Taking Multiple Shots  
2. Select one of the following options and  
This feature allows you to take a series of shots in a  
continuous sequence.  
press  
:
Ⅲ Off to deactivate the multiple shots option.  
To shoot a series of individual pictures:  
Ⅲ 4 to take a series of four pictures that are then  
combined into one image.  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey) >  
Multi Shot > Series Shot.  
Ⅲ 9 to take a series of nine pictures that are then  
combined into one image.  
Once selected, resolution is changed to 320.  
Note  
2I. Camera  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ⅲ 16 to take a series of 16 pictures that are then  
combined into one image.  
2. Press Capture (left softkey),  
, or the camera  
button to take the picture. (The picture will  
automatically be saved in your selected storage  
area.)  
3. Press Capture (left softkey),  
, or the camera  
button to take the pictures. (The My Albums folder  
will display up to nine thumbnail pictures per  
screen.)  
Selecting Camera Settings  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey) >  
Settings..  
Using the Zoom  
This feature allows you to zoom in on an object when  
you take a picture. Depending on your resolution  
settings, you can adjust the zoom from 1x to 10x.  
2. Select an option and press  
Ⅲ Resolution to select a picture’s file size (2 M, 1.3 M,  
:
800, 640, or 320).  
1. From camera mode, repeatedly press the  
navigation key left to zoom out and right to zoom  
in. It may take several presses to get the desired  
zoom.  
Ⅲ Quality to select the picture quality setting (Fine,  
Normal, or Economy).  
Ⅲ Shutter Sound to select a shutter sound (Shutter 1-4  
or Off).  
Zooming will not function if the resolution is set to  
2M.  
Note  
Ⅲ Status Bar to turn the status bar On (Show) or Off  
(Hide) when in camera mode.  
Zooming works in the following manner at each  
resolution setting: 1.3M up to x3 zoom, 800 up tp x5  
zoom, 640 or 320 up to x10 zoom.  
Ⅲ Storage to select the destination for the image files  
(Phone or Card).  
110  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ⅲ To return to camcorder mode to take another  
video, press  
Recording Videos  
.
6. Press Next (right softkey) and select an option:  
Ⅲ Send Pic/Video to send the video. (See “Sending  
In addition to taking pictures, you can record, view, and  
send videos with your phone’s built-in video camera.  
Sprint Picture Mail” on page 115.)  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Photos >  
Ⅲ Play to play the video.  
Camcorder.  
Ⅲ Upload to upload the video to online albums.  
2. Select Video Mail or Long Video.  
Ⅲ Assign to assign the video as a video ringer or to  
voice calls.  
Video Mail can be at most 30 seconds in length, but  
the length of a Long Video is dependent on both the  
quality settings and storage type used (phone or  
memory card).  
Note  
Ⅲ Erase to delete the video.  
Ⅲ Post to Service to upload your video to a third party  
online service.  
Changing the Quality settings alters the length of  
available recording time: Fine (10 seconds), Normal  
(20 seconds, and Economy (30 seconds).  
Ⅲ Camcorder to return to camcorder mode.  
Ⅲ Review Album to review all pictures and videos  
saved in the In Phone folder.  
3. Using the phone’s display screen as a viewfinder,  
aim the lens at your subject.  
Video Mode Options  
4. Press Record (left softkey),  
, or the side  
) to begin recording.  
When the phone is in camcorder mode, press Options  
(right softkey) to display additional camcorder options:  
camera button (  
5. Press Done (left softkey),  
, or the side camera  
button to stop recording. (The video will  
ⅷ Selftimer to activate the timer. (See “Setting the  
Selftimer” on page 108.)  
automatically be saved to the default folder.)  
2I. Camera  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
ⅷ Fun Tools.. to select from the following options:  
Viewing Your Camcorder’s Status Area  
Display  
Ⅲ Color Tones to select a variety of color tones for the  
picture (None, Monochrome, Negative, Sepia, Green  
or Aqua).  
Brightness Zoom Image Saved  
ⅷ Controls.. to select from the following options:  
Ⅲ White Balance to adjust white balance based on  
lighting conditions. Select from Auto, Sunny, Cloudy,  
Tungsten, Fluorescent, or Manual.  
0
01  
Status  
ⅷ Settings.. to select from the following options:  
Ⅲ Quality to select between Fine, Normal, or Economy.  
Ⅲ Storage to select the destination for the video files  
(Phone or Card).  
Settings  
Display  
Image  
Ⅲ Video Length to select the maximum allowed  
size for the recording. Choose from Video Mail or  
Long Video.  
ⅷ Launch to select from the following options:  
Storage  
Location  
s
00/30  
Options  
Ⅲ Review Pictures to display the videos saved in the  
In Phone folder. (See “In Phone Folder” on  
page 113 for details.)  
Record  
Record  
Camcorder  
Options  
Ⅲ Camera to switch to camera mode. (See “Taking  
Pictures” on page 105 for details.)  
112  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To review your stored pictures and videos in the In Phone  
folder:  
Storing Pictures and Videos  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Albums > In Phone.  
> Photos > My  
Your phone’s picture and video storage area is  
called My Albums. There are three types of folders  
in My Albums:  
2. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through  
the pictures and videos.  
ⅷ In Phone  
ⅷ Memory Card  
ⅷ Online Albums  
microSD Picture and Video Folders  
You can save pictures and videos directly to the  
microSD card using your phone’s pictures and videos  
settings.  
Storage Options  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Photos >  
To review your stored pictures and videos on the  
microSD card:  
Settings and Info > Auto Save to.  
2. Select Phone or Memory Card.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Albums > Memory Card.  
> Photos > My  
In Phone Folder  
2. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through  
the pictures and videos.  
Your phone’s internal storage area is called the In  
Phone folder. From the In Phone folder, you can view all  
the pictures you have stored there, send items to the  
Sprint Picture Mail site (www.sprint.com/picturemail),  
delete files, and access additional options.  
2I. Camera  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ⅷ Assign to assign the current image as a Picture ID or  
Screen Saver or the selected video clip as a Video  
Ringer or Voice Calls.  
In Phone Folder and microSD Card  
Options  
ⅷ Erase to erase the image or selected images.  
When you are viewing the In Phone folder or the  
microSD card folders, press Options (right softkey) to  
display the following options:  
Deleting pictures will free up memory space in your  
phone to enable you to take more pictures. Once  
deleted, pictures cannot be uploaded to your online  
Sprint Picture Mail account.  
Note  
ⅷ Play to play a selected video.  
ⅷ Send to send an image or video to another user  
using Picture Mail or to a Bluetooth-enabled printer.  
ⅷ Copy/Move to copy or move an image or video to an  
installed memory card.  
ⅷ Upload to upload pictures to the Sprint Picture Mail  
Web site (www.sprint.com/picturemail). (Depending on  
your settings, you may be prompted to accept a data  
connection.)  
ⅷ Detail/Edit to attach a text caption or view the media  
information associated with the image.  
Ⅲ Text Caption to edit the selected picture’s caption.  
Ⅲ See “Uploading Pictures” on page 118.  
Ⅲ Media Info to display the file’s information such as  
caption and date taken.  
If this is the first time you have accessed Sprint  
Picture Mail, you will be prompted to register your  
Sprint Picture Mail account. See “Registering Your  
Sprint Picture Mail Account” on page 107.  
Note  
ⅷ Album list to display the list of albums saved in your  
phone.  
ⅷ Media Filter to display either All media types, Pictures  
Only, or Videos Only.  
ⅷ Post to Service to upload your file to a third-party online  
service.  
ⅷ Camera/Camcorder Mode to switch to either the  
camera or camcorder mode.  
ⅷ Print.. to display to print an image by either Home  
Delivery, Retail Pickup, PictBridge Print or Bluetooth  
connection.  
114  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Online Albums  
Sending Sprint Picture Mail  
Once a picture is taken, it is automatically saved to the  
preselected folder (In Phone or Memory Card).  
Alternatively, you can save pictures to your Online  
Albums folder. From the Online Albums folder, you can  
view all the pictures you have taken, move selected  
images to your In Phone folder, delete images, and  
access additional picture options.  
Once you have taken a picture or a video, you can use  
the messaging capabilities of your phone to instantly  
share it with family and friends. You can send a picture  
to up to 25 people at a time using their email  
addresses or their phone numbers.  
Sending Pictures and Videos From the  
In Phone Folder  
Before you can use the Online Albums folder, you  
must first go online and create a Picture Mail account  
and password.  
Note  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Albums > In Phone.  
> Photos > My  
To review pictures in the Online Albums folder:  
1. Highlight and press > Photos > My  
Ⅲ You can also select the Memory Card location as  
your file source.  
Albums > Online Albums.  
2. Highlight a picture or video to send and press  
. (The check box in the upper left corner will  
be marked. You can select multiple pictures and  
videos.)  
2. Use your navigation key to scroll through and view  
the pictures.  
3. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Send > via Picture Mail  
to then choose from a current Contacts entry.  
Ⅲ You can also choose to upload the currently  
selected image to a Bluetooth device (page 129).  
2I. Camera  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
8. To include a voice memo (audio message) with  
The first time you send Sprint Picture Mail, you will be  
prompted to register your Sprint Picture Mail account.  
(See “Registering Your Sprint Picture Mail Account”  
on page 107.)  
Note  
the picture, select the box next to Audio.  
Ⅲ Press RECORD (left softkey) or press  
recording. (Maximum recording time is 10  
seconds.)  
to start  
4. Select a Contacts entry by highlighting it and  
pressing  
Ⅲ Press DONE (left softkey) to end the recording and  
return to the Picture Mail message.  
.
Ⅲ Press NEW ADDR (right softkey) to manually enter  
either a wireless phone number or email address  
and press CONTINUE (left softkey).  
9. Confirm the recipients, message, voice memo, and  
pictures or videos.  
Ⅲ To change a recipient, select the recipient, press  
the appropriate softkey, and follow the instructions  
in step 4 to select or edit the recipient.  
5. Press CONTINUE (left softkey) when you are finished  
adding recipients.  
6. If you wish to include a subject, scroll to Subj: and  
press ADD (right softkey). Enter your subject and  
press NEXT (left softkey) to save and exit.  
Ⅲ To change the text message, scroll to Text and  
press the appropriate softkey.  
Ⅲ To change the voice memo, highlight Audio and  
press the appropriate softkey.  
7. If you wish to include a text message, scroll to Text:  
and press ADD (right softkey). Enter your message  
(or press OPTIONS [right softkey] to select Preset  
Message or Recent Msg) and press NEXT (left softkey)  
to save and exit. (See “Entering Text in Portrait  
Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape  
Mode” on page 34.)  
Ⅲ To change the attached pictures or videos, select  
the thumbnail(s) and press CHANGE (right  
softkey). Highlight the picture or video you wish to  
send and press  
.
10. Press Send (left softkey) to send the message.  
116  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Highlight a picture or video you wish to send and  
press  
. (The check box on the upper left  
corner will be marked. You can select multiple  
pictures.)  
Sending Pictures From Messaging  
You can also send Sprint Picture Mail from your  
phone’s Messages menu.  
1. Highlight  
, highlight Send Message >  
Picture Mail to access the Messaging menu.  
>
5. Press NEXT (left softkey).  
6. To complete and send the message, follow steps  
5–9 in “Sending Pictures and Videos From the In  
Phone Folder” on page 115.  
– or –  
Select  
and press  
> Messages > Send  
Message > Picture Mail.  
Managing Sprint Picture Mail  
2. Select a contact.  
– or –  
Using the Sprint Picture Mail Website  
Press NEW ADDR (right softkey) and enter a mobile  
number or an email address and press CONTINUE  
(left softkey).  
Once you have uploaded pictures or videos to your  
online Picture Mail account at www.sprint.com/picturemail  
(see “In Phone Folder and microSD Card Options” on  
page 114), you can use your computer to manage  
your pictures. From the Sprint Picture Mail website, you  
can share pictures, edit album titles, add captions, and  
organize images. You can even send your pictures to  
be printed at participating retail locations.  
– or –  
Enter additional recipients by pressing MULTIPLE  
(left softkey), place a check mark alongside a  
desired entry, and press CONTINUE (left softkey).  
3. Select the location of the image In Phone, Memory  
Card, Online Albums, Take New Picture, Take New Video,  
or Text Only.  
2I. Camera  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You will also have access to picture management tools  
to improve and customize your pictures. You’ll be able  
to lighten, darken, crop, add antique effects, add comic  
bubbles and cartoon effects, and use other features to  
transform your pictures.  
To view your online pictures from your phone:  
1. Highlight and press > Photos > My  
Albums > Online Albums. (Depending on your  
settings you may be prompted to accept a data  
connection.) (The My Uploads folder and your  
albums are displayed.)  
To access the Sprint Picture Mail Web site:  
1. From your computer’s Internet connection, go to  
www.sprint.com/picturemail.  
To expand a selected picture from thumbnail to  
full-screen, press Expand (left softkey).  
Tip  
2. Enter your phone number and Sprint Picture Mail  
password to register. (See “Registering Your Sprint  
Picture Mail Account” on page 107.)  
2. Highlight a picture and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) to display your online picture options.  
Uploading Pictures  
Managing Online Pictures From Your  
Phone  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Photos > My  
Albums > In Phone or Memory Card. (Thumbnail  
pictures will be displayed.)  
Use your phone to manage, edit, or share pictures you  
have uploaded to the Sprint Picture Mail Web site at  
www.sprint.com/picturemail. (See “In Phone Folder and  
microSD Card Options” on page 114 for information  
about uploading.)  
2. Select a picture or pictures you wish to upload by  
highlighting the image and pressing  
.
3. Select the picture(s) to upload and press OPTIONS  
(right softkey) > Upload > My Uploads or My Albums.  
This actions then queues your file for uploading.  
4. Press CONTINUE (left softkey) to return to the  
previous page.  
118  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Downloading Your Online Pictures  
Sending Online Sprint Picture Mail  
From your online Sprint Picture Mail albums display at  
www.sprint.com/picturemail, you can select pictures to  
download to either your In Phone or Memory Card  
locations.  
To send pictures using the online Address Book:  
1. From the online Sprint Picture Mail display at  
www.sprint.com/picturemail, select a picture and click  
the Send Picture Mail button. (See “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 118.)  
1. From the online pictures display, place a check  
mark on the picture you wish to download and  
press OPTIONS (right softkey). (See “Managing  
Online Pictures From Your Phone” on page 118.)  
2. Click Continue and select Address Book.  
3. Select a recipient or recipients from your Online  
Address Book.  
2. Highlight Assign and press  
3. Select one of the following options and  
press  
.
4. When you have finished selecting recipients select  
Send Picture Mail.  
.
To create an album online:  
Ⅲ Picture ID to download and assign the selected  
picture as a Picture ID.  
1. Click on the Media tab to display all of your  
currently uploaded images and videos.  
Ⅲ Screen Saver to download and assign the selected  
picture as a screen saver/wallpaper.  
2. Navigate to the Album section of the page.  
3. Click the Create New Album link, enter a name for  
the new album, and click OK.  
2I. Camera  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To place files into an existing album:  
5. Click Share album to send your Sprint Picture Mail  
album to the designated recipients.  
1. Navigate the Other Options section of the Media tab  
(located at the lower right of the page).  
Accessing Online Picture Options From  
Your Phone  
2. Click the Move/Copy Media link.  
3. Select the source of the files.  
1. Highlight  
menu.  
and press  
to access the main  
4. Place a check mark on each image you wish to  
add to your Album.  
2. Select a picture from your Photos > My Albums >  
Online Albums. (See “Managing Online Pictures  
From Your Phone” on page 118.)  
5. Select whether you would like to Copy or Move the  
selected images.  
3. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) to display the image  
options.  
6. Select either an existing Album or Create New Album  
and click OK.  
– or –  
To send an album from the online pictures menu:  
Press EXPAND (left softkey) to expand the selected  
picture.  
1. Navigate the Other Options section of the Media tab  
(located at the lower right of the page). (See  
“Managing Online Pictures From Your Phone” on  
page 118.)  
4. Highlight an option and press  
.
Ⅲ Send to send an image or video to another user  
using Picture Mail or to a Bluetooth-enabled  
printer.  
2. Click Share Album.  
3. Select a recipient or recipients from your Online  
Address Book.  
Ⅲ Print.. to display to print an image by either Home  
Delivery, Retail Pickup, PictBridge Print or  
Bluetooth connection.  
4. Enter an invitation message.  
120  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅲ Post to Service to upload your file to a third-party  
online service.  
●
●
Move This to move the selected picture to the  
album.  
Ⅲ Assign to assign the pictures to be used as a:  
Move All to move all pictures in the current  
album (or Inbox) to the target album.  
●
Picture ID to be displayed when a particular  
Caller ID (Contacts entry) assignment is met  
for an incoming call.  
Ⅲ Detail/Edit to attach a text caption or view the  
media information associated with the image.  
●
●
Screen Saver to be used by the screen saver  
application.  
●
Text Caption to edit the selected picture’s  
caption.  
Incoming/Outgoing Calls to be displayed during  
●
Media Info to display the file’s information such  
the notification of an incoming call.  
as caption and date taken.  
Ⅲ Save to phone to copy the selected picture to the  
Saved to Phone folder. (See “In Phone Folder” on  
page 113.)  
Ⅲ Album list to display the list of albums saved in  
your phone.  
Ⅲ Media Filter to display either All media types,  
Ⅲ Erase to select Erase Selection or Erase All to erase a  
single picture or all pictures saved in the current  
album (or Inbox).  
Pictures Only, or Videos Only.  
Ⅲ Camera/Camcorder Mode to switch to either the  
camera or camcorder mode.  
Ⅲ Copy/Move to copy or move pictures to a selected  
album:  
●
Copy This to copy the selected picture to the  
album.  
●
Copy All to copy all pictures in the current  
album (or Inbox) to the target album.  
2I. Camera  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To access your online Albums options from your phone:  
Printing Pictures Using PictBridge  
1. Display the album list in the Online Sprint Picture  
Mail menu. (See “Managing Online Pictures From  
Your Phone” on page 118.)  
Your phone is PictBridge compatible, allowing you to  
print directly from your phone without connecting to a  
computer. Simply connect your phone to a PictBridge-  
enabled printer and print your photos.  
2. Select an album.  
3. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) to display options.  
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using  
PictBridge.  
Note  
4. Select an option and press  
.
Ⅲ Send to send the album through the Sprint Picture  
Mail Web site.  
To print pictures directly from your phone:  
1. Highlight and press > Photos > PictBridge.  
Ⅲ New Album to create a new album. Enter a new  
album name and select Next (left softkey). If  
additional albums are present, you are provided  
with additional options:  
2. Connect your phone to the PictBridge-enabled  
printer by using a USB cable. (Wait until the  
connection is completed.)  
●
Rename Album to rename a selected album.  
3. Read the Connect Printer message and press  
NEXT(left softkey). The Select Folder pop-up appears  
in the display. Select the folder location of the  
image.  
●
Erase Album to delete an existing album.  
Ⅲ Album Info to display information about the album.  
You can view the name of the album, the creation  
date, and the number of pictures and videos in  
the album.  
4. Highlight the desired image and press NEXT (left  
softkey). (To select multiple images, press  
to  
place a check mark next to each image selected.)  
122  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Set the printer settings using your navigation key.  
Ⅲ Copies: to set the number of copies to print.  
Ⅲ Type: to select a print type option:  
7. Select Yes to confirm printing. Follow the  
instructions on the display to unplug the USB  
cable from the phone.  
From time to time you may encounter printing  
problems. Your phone will display any printer  
error messages informing you of the specific  
problems encountered. Please refer to the  
user’s guide that came with your printer for  
descriptions, explanations, and possible  
resolutions for any error messages.  
PictBridge  
Error  
Messages  
●
Standard prints the standard image.  
●
Index prints the index information.  
These options may vary and are dependent on the  
printer’s capabilities.  
Note  
Ⅲ Paper Size: You can set the print size from Default or  
4x6. (Print sizes may vary according to the type of  
printer you have.)  
Order Prints  
These sizes may vary and are dependent on the  
printer’s capabilities.  
Note  
This menu allows you to order prints from third party  
vendors by uploading images saved on your phone.  
Images saved at the highest quality and resolution  
settings produce the best prints.  
Ⅲ Date Print: You can imprint the date on your  
pictures. Select On or Off. (Date stamping may not  
be available depending on the type of printer you  
have.)  
1. Highlight  
Prints.  
and press  
> Photos > Order  
Ⅲ Border: You can assign a border along the edges  
of the image. You can turn this option on or off.  
2. Select an onscreen option.  
6. Press Preview (right softkey) to preview the image,  
Ⅲ Options include: Home Delivery or Retail Pickup.  
or press Print (left softkey) to print the image.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
2I. Camera  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Settings and Info  
This menu allows you to configure where pictures are  
saved, view your account information, or set the view  
between portrait or landscape mode.  
1. Highlight  
and Info.  
and press  
> Photos > Settings  
2. Select one of the following options:  
Ⅲ Auto Save to to choose between Phone and Memory  
Card as the default location to save pictures or  
videos.  
Ⅲ Status Bar to select whether the Status Bar is  
displayed onscreen when the camera/camcorder  
is active.  
Ⅲ Account Info to display your current Picture Mail  
account settings via an online connection.  
124  
2I. Camera  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
2J. Bluetooth  
By default, your device’s Bluetooth feature is turned off.  
Turning Bluetooth on makes your phone “discoverable”  
by other in-range Bluetooth devices.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Turning Bluetooth On and Off (page 125)  
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu (page 126)  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices (page 127)  
Voice Routing (page 128)  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
1. Highlight  
> On/Off.  
and press  
> Settings > Bluetooth  
2. Highlight On and press  
to enable Bluetooth.  
FTP Contents Folder (page 129)  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
Sending Items Via Bluetooth (page 129)  
1. Highlight  
> On/Off.  
and press  
> Settings > Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
2. Highlight Off and press  
to disable Bluetooth.  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology  
that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of  
Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free  
car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers,  
printers, and wireless phones. The Bluetooth  
communication range is usually up to approximately  
30 feet.  
2J. Bluetooth  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
     
ⅷ Setting your phone’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for  
other Bluetooth devices  
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection  
status at a glance:  
ⅷ Displaying your phone’s Bluetooth address  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
Bluetooth is hidden.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Bluetooth.  
Bluetooth is visible (active and enabled).  
2. Set your Bluetooth options.  
Bluetooth is visible and connected to a device  
or transferring data.  
Ⅲ Select Visibility > Always visible, Visible for 3 min, or  
Hidden to set your Bluetooth visibility.  
Ⅲ Select My Device Name to rename your phone for  
Bluetooth.  
Bluetooth is active and connected to a  
Bluetooth Headset.  
Ⅲ Select My Device Info to display your phone’s  
Bluetooth is active, connected and playing  
music via the Stereo Bluetooth Headset.  
Bluetooth profiles and address.  
Ⅲ Select Exchange Folders to display your phone’s  
Bluetooth destination folder for files  
communicated between your phone and a  
Bluetooth-enabled device using the FTP transfer  
protocol.  
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu  
The Bluetooth Settings menu allows you to set up many  
of the characteristics of your phone’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Ⅲ Select Voice Routing Incoming to display your  
phone’s Bluetooth communication priority when  
an incoming call is detected (page 128).  
ⅷ Entering or changing the name your phone uses for  
Bluetooth communication  
126  
2J. Bluetooth  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ⅲ Select Voice Routing Outgoing to display your  
phone’s Bluetooth communication priority when  
an outgoing call is made (page 129).  
To pair your phone with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Highlight  
Add a New....  
and press  
> Tools > Bluetooth >  
To access the Trusted Devices list:  
2. Highlight a device category and press  
phone will display a list of discovered in-range  
Bluetooth devices.)  
. (Your  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Tools > Bluetooth >  
Trusted Devices or Pair with Hands Free.  
Ⅲ This displays your phone’s current list of external  
trusted Bluetooth devices.  
Ⅲ Select from: Headset/Car Kits, All, Phone, PC, or  
Printer.  
3. Highlight a device and press  
(right softkey) to obtain more information about the  
device prior to pairing.  
. Select Info  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
Paired Devices  
4. Enter the passkey and press  
.
5. Enter a unique Device Name and press DONE  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish  
trusted connections between your phone and another  
Bluetooth device. When you pair devices, they share a  
passkey, allowing for fast, secure connections while  
bypassing the discovery and authentication process.  
(left softkey).  
Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and  
operations may be different, and functions such as  
transfer or exchange may not be possible with all  
Bluetooth-compatible devices.  
Note  
Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation to obtain  
the passkey for any other devices. In most instances,  
this passkey is ‘0000” or the last four digits of the  
telephone number.  
Note  
2J. Bluetooth  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Pairing With a Computer  
Configuring Incoming Voice Routing  
If you are going to be pairing with a computer’s  
Bluetooth interface, you will need to allow the computer  
to initiate pairing with your phone.  
Similarly, you may choose to have the incoming call  
(and associated audio) routed according to which  
device answers the call, rather than having the audio  
automatically routed to the headset when it is  
connected (paired).  
To allow your phone to be paired with another Bluetooth  
device:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Voice Routing Incoming.  
> Settings > Bluetooth  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Add a New... > PC.  
> Tools > Bluetooth >  
2. Highlight an incoming routing option and  
press  
2. Follow the onscreen prompts to enter your passkey  
and press  
.
.
Ⅲ Hands-Free allows you to answer the incoming call  
only from the paired Bluetooth device if it is paired  
and active.  
Voice Routing  
Ⅲ Phone allows you to answer the incoming call only  
from the phone, even if there is an actively paired  
hands-free Bluetooth device.  
By separating both the incoming and outgoing call  
routing features, you can now choose the call transfer  
behavior most appropriate for your current use.  
Ⅲ Device Answered allows you to answer the  
incoming call via either the phone or paired  
Bluetooth device. Whichever device is used to  
receive the incoming call will have all associated  
audio routing made to it.  
128  
2J. Bluetooth  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Outgoing Voice Routing  
FTP Contents Folder  
In the case of an accessory or car kit, capable of  
initiating a call without direct access to the phone, you  
do not need to manually transfer the audio after  
initiating an outgoing call if you choose the Device  
Initiated option.  
You can send and receive files between your phone  
and a Bluetooth-enabled computer using the FTP  
transfer protocol. The destination folder on your phone  
must first be set up to exchange data via FTP.  
To assign a folder for FTP transfers:  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Voice Routing Outgoing.  
> Settings > Bluetooth  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Exchange Folders.  
> Settings > Bluetooth  
2. Highlight an outgoing routing option and  
press  
.
2. Highlight the folder location (In Phone or Memory  
card) and press  
Ⅲ Hands-Free allows you to initiate the outgoing call  
only from the paired Bluetooth device.  
.
Ⅲ Phone allows you to initiate the outgoing call only  
from the phone.  
Sending Items Via Bluetooth  
Ⅲ Device Initiated allows you to initiate the outgoing  
call via either the phone or paired Bluetooth  
device. Whichever device initiates the outgoing  
call will have all associated audio directed to it.  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and  
capabilities, you may be able to send pictures,  
Contacts information, or other items using a Bluetooth  
connection.  
2J. Bluetooth  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
             
To send contacts information via Bluetooth:  
1. Highlight and press > Contacts.  
To send pictures via Bluetooth:  
1. Highlight  
Albums.  
and press  
> Photos > My  
2. Highlight an entry and press OPTIONS (right softkey)  
> Send Contact.  
2. Select an album (In Phone, Memory Card, or  
Online Albums) and press  
.
3. Place a checkmark next to the Contact entry you  
want to send by first selecting an entry and  
3. Select a picture by highlighting it and then  
pressing  
pressing  
.
.
4. Press SEND CONTACT (left softkey). (The phone  
begins searching for available Bluetooth devices.  
Bluetooth-capable phones will appear in the list  
with an adjacent phone icon.)  
4. Press OPTIONS (right softkey)> Send > via Bluetooth >  
Yes. (The phone begins searching for available  
Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth-capable phones will  
appear in the list with an adjacent phone icon.)  
Ⅲ If the device isn’t in the list, select OPTIONS  
(right softkey) > Search again.  
5. From the list of Found Devices, select the Bluetooth  
device and press  
.
5. From the list of Found Devices, highlight the target  
6. Select Yes. (The recipient’s phone displays an  
onscreen message asking whether the person  
would like to receive and save your Contact entry  
to his or her list.)  
Bluetooth device and press SELECT (left softkey).  
6. Select SEND (left softkey) to confirm you want to  
send the contact. (The recipient’s phone displays  
an onscreen message asking whether the person  
would like to receive and save your Contact entry  
to his or her list.)  
7. The recipient must either accept and save the  
image, or reject the incoming data.  
7. The recipient must either accept and save the  
contact, or reject the incoming data.  
130  
2J. Bluetooth  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Sprint Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and  
personal greeting as soon as your phone is activated.  
3A. Sprint Service:  
The Basics  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Ⅲ Create your passcode.  
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.  
Ⅲ Record your greeting.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Voicemail (page 132)  
Text Messaging (SMS) (page 135)  
SMS Voice Messaging (page 137)  
Caller ID (page 139)  
Voicemail Passcode  
Note  
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a  
passcode when setting up your voicemail to protect  
against unauthorized access. Without a passcode,  
anyone who has access to your handset is able to  
access your voicemail messages.  
Call Waiting (page 139)  
Making a Three-Way Call (page 140)  
Call Forwarding (page 140)  
Roaming (page 141)  
Voicemail Notification  
There are several ways your phone alerts you to a new  
message:  
Voicemail  
ⅷ By displaying a message on the screen.  
ⅷ By sounding the assigned ringer type.  
ⅷ By the LED blinking red.  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
Your phone automatically transfers all unanswered  
calls to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or  
ⅷ By displaying  
at the top of your screen.  
132  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
New Voicemail Message Alerts  
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages  
When you receive a new voice message, your phone  
alerts you and prompts you to call your voicemail.  
You can review your messages directly from your  
wireless phone or from any other touch-tone phone. To  
dial from your wireless phone, either speed dial your  
voicemail or use the menu keys.  
To call your voicemail:  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
.
Using One-Touch Message Access  
To display your Missed Log:  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
voicemail box.)  
. (Your phone will dial your  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Missed Alerts.  
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you may not receive notification of new  
voicemail messages. Sprint recommends that you  
periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area  
code + your wireless phone number. When your  
Note  
Using the Menu Keys on Your Phone to Access  
Your Messages  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Messages >  
Voicemail > Call Voicemail.  
voicemail answers, press  
and enter your  
passcode. Roaming rates apply when you access  
voicemail while roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network.  
– or –  
Select  
> Voicemail.  
You are charged for airtime minutes when you are  
accessing your voicemail from your wireless phone.  
Note  
Your phone accepts messages even when it is  
turned off. However, your phone notifies you of new  
messages only when it is turned on and you are in a  
Sprint service area.  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Another Phone to Access Messages  
Voicemail Key Guide  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while  
listening to voicemail messages.  
2. When your voicemail answers, press  
.
3. Enter your passcode.  
Date/Time  
Replay  
Erase  
Send Reply  
Rewind  
Advance  
Forward  
Save  
When you call into voicemail, you first hear the  
header information (date, time, and sender  
information) for the message. To skip directly to the  
message, press 4 during the header.  
Tip  
Clearing the Message Icon  
Return Call  
Help  
Your phone may temporarily continue to display the  
message icon after you have checked your voice and  
text messages.  
Cancel  
Skip  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Voicemail > Clear Envelope.  
> Messages >  
2. Highlight Yes or No and press  
.
134  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Composing Text Messages  
Text Messaging (SMS)  
1. Select  
> Send Message > Text Message.  
With Text Messaging (SMS), you can send and receive  
instant text messages between your wireless phone  
and another messaging-ready phone. When you  
receive a new message, it will automatically display on  
your phone’s screen.  
– or –  
Highlight  
Message > Text Message.  
and press  
> Messages > Send  
2. Select an existing Contact (Go to Contacts).  
In addition, Text Messaging includes a variety of preset  
messages, such as “Where are you?” that make  
composing messages fast and easy. Use your phone  
to customize your own preset messages (up to 128  
characters).  
Ⅲ Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts  
(qualifying Contacts entries must contain a  
wireless phone number or an email address).  
– or –  
Press NEW ADDR (right softkey) to manually enter  
either a phone number or email address.  
You can instantly access all your phone’s messaging  
options, including Text Messaging, using the main  
screen carousel. See “2B. Navigating the Main  
Screen” on page 40 for details.  
Tip  
●
Phone Number to use the keypad to enter a  
wireless phone number directly.  
●
Email Address to enter the recipient’s email  
See your service plan for applicable charges for Text  
Messaging and SMS Voice Messaging.  
Note  
Note  
address.  
– or –  
Press MULTIPLE (left softkey) to select more than  
one recipient and press  
Creating messages can also be accessed from the  
Main Menu > Messages or by pressing  
on  
text  
.
the QWERTY keyboard.  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
       
3. Press CONTINUE (left softkey) when you have  
finished entering recipients. (You may include up  
to 10 recipients per message.)  
Accessing Text Messages  
To read an SMS Text message:  
4. Enter a message, use the preset messages or  
ᮣ
When you receive a text message, you will  
automatically see it on your phone’s screen. Use  
your navigation key to scroll down and view the  
entire message.  
emoticons (smileys).  
Ⅲ To type a message, use either your keypad or  
keyboard to enter your message. (See “Entering  
Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or “Entering  
Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
To reply to a text message:  
1. While the message is open, press REPLY (left  
Ⅲ Use the OPTIONS (right softkey) to select a Text  
Mode (such as T9[English] or Emoticons).  
softkey).  
2. Compose your reply or use the preset messages  
Ⅲ To use a preset message, press OPTIONS (right  
softkey), select Add Preset Message, and then select  
or icons.  
Ⅲ To type a message, use your keypad to enter your  
message. Use the right softkey to select an input  
mode. (See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on  
page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape Mode”  
on page 34.)  
a message and press  
.
Ⅲ You may select additional messaging options by  
pressing OPTIONS [right softkey] to Set Callback # or  
Mark as Urgent.  
5. Press SEND (left softkey) to deliver your message.  
Ⅲ To use a preset message, press the right softkey,  
select Add Preset Message, highlight a message or  
emoticon, and press  
.
136  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅲ To use a smiley or emoticon, press the right  
softkey, select Text Mode > Emoticons, press the  
number that corresponds to your selected icon.  
3. Enter your new message or changes and  
press . (See “Entering Text in Portrait Mode”  
on page 30 or “Entering Text in Landscape Mode”  
on page 34.)  
Ⅲ You may select additional messaging options by  
pressing OPTIONS [right softkey] to Set Callback # or  
Mark as Urgent.  
SMS Voice Messaging  
3. Press SEND (left softkey) to deliver your message.  
SMS Voice Messaging lets you send a voice message  
to other SMS-enabled phones or to working email  
addresses without making a phone call. Just record a  
message and send it directly to the recipient’s phone  
messaging inbox.  
Preset Messages  
Preset messages make it easy to compose text  
messages.  
To add or edit preset messages:  
Activating SMS Voice Messaging  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Settings > Preset Messages.  
> Messages >  
To use SMS Voice Messaging capabilities, you will first  
need to register your phone. Once you have registered,  
incoming SMS Voice messages will be automatically  
downloaded to your phone.  
2. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) > Add New.  
– or –  
Highlight a message and press OPTIONS > Delete.  
1. When you turn on your phone, you will be  
prompted to register your phone to receive SMS  
Voice messages.  
– or –  
Edit an existing message by pressing EDIT  
(left softkey).  
2. Select Yes. (When activation is complete, an  
activation confirmation screen is displayed.)  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
         
2. Select an existing Contact and press  
.
If you select No during step 2 above, you will see an  
alert message. If you select No after reading the  
message, incoming SMS Voice messages will not be  
downloaded to your phone.  
Note  
– or –  
Press NEW ADDR (right softkey) to manually enter  
either a phone number or email address and  
press  
.
Playing an SMS Voice Message  
●
Phone Number to use the keypad to enter a  
wireless phone number directly.  
1. Highlight  
VoiceSMS.  
and press  
> Messages >  
●
Email Address to enter the recipient’s email  
address.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
indicates an unplayed SMS Voice  
message.  
SMS  
– or –  
Press MULTIPLE (left softkey) to select more than  
one recipient and press  
indicates an SMS Voice message you have  
already listened to.  
.
SMS  
3. Press CONTINUE (left softkey) when you have  
finished selecting and entering recipients.  
2. Highlight the message you want to play and  
press . (To display the message options,  
press Options [right softkey].)  
4. Start recording after the beep. (You can record up  
to two minutes.)  
Composing SMS Voice Messages  
5. To finish recording, press DONE (left softkey).  
1. Select  
> Send Message > VoiceSMS.  
6. Press SEND (left softkey) to send the voice  
message.  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press  
> Messages > Send  
7. Enter a name to identify yourself and press DONE  
(left softkey) to send the voice message.  
Message > VoiceSMS.  
138  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To block your phone number from being displayed when  
you make a call:  
Accessing SMS Voice Messages  
ᮣ
When you receive a voice message, your phone  
will display a pop-up notification. Use your softkeys  
to access and play the voice message.  
1. Press  
2. Enter the number you want to call.  
3. Press  
.
To reply to an SMS Voice message:  
.
1. From the VoiceSMS inbox, highlight a VoiceSMS  
To permanently block your number, call Sprint  
Customer Service.  
message and press REPLY (left softkey).  
2. Record your reply and finish recording by pressing  
Call Waiting  
DONE (left softkey).  
3. Press SEND (left softkey) to send the voice  
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you to  
incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your phone’s  
screen informs you that another call is coming in and  
displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and  
you are in digital mode).  
message reply.  
Caller ID  
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before  
answering the phone by displaying the number of the  
incoming call. If you do not want your number  
displayed when you make a call, follow these steps.  
To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call:  
ᮣ
Press  
. (This puts the first caller on hold and  
answers the second call.)  
To switch back to the first caller:  
ᮣ
Press  
again.  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ⅲ Enter Phone # to use the keypad to enter a wireless  
phone number directly.  
For those calls where you don’t want to be  
interrupted, you can temporarily disable Call Waiting  
Tip  
by pressing  
before placing your call.  
4. Press  
. (This puts the first caller on hold and  
dials the second number.)  
Call Waiting is automatically reactivated once you  
end the call.  
5. When you’re connected to the second party, press  
JOIN (right softkey) to begin your three-way call.  
Making a Three-Way Call  
If one of the people you called hangs up during your  
call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you  
initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all callers  
are disconnected.  
With Three-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at  
the same time. When using this feature, the normal  
airtime rates will be charged for each of the two calls.  
1. Enter a number and press  
.
Call Forwarding  
2. Once you have established the connection, press  
OPTIONS (right softkey) > 3-Way Call and  
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls  
to another phone number – even when your phone is  
turned off. You can continue to make calls from your  
phone when you have activated Call Forwarding.  
press  
.
3. Choose the second number by selecting one of  
the following:  
To activate Call Forwarding:  
Ⅲ Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts  
(qualifying Contacts entries must contain a  
wireless phone number or an email address).  
1. Press  
.
2. Enter the area code and phone number to which  
your future calls should be forwarded.  
Ⅲ Recent History to select a number from your Recent  
History entries.  
140  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the  
activation of Call Forwarding.)  
Roaming on Other Digital Networks  
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call  
quality and security will be similar to the quality you  
receive when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network. However, you may not be able to access  
certain features, such as data services, depending on  
the available network.  
To deactivate Call Forwarding:  
1. Press  
.
2. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the  
deactivation.)  
You are charged a higher rate for calls you have  
forwarded.  
Note  
If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide  
Sprint Network, your call is dropped. If your call is  
dropped in an area where you think Sprint service is  
available, turn your phone off and on again to  
reconnect to the network.  
Note  
Roaming  
Checking for Voicemail Messages While  
Roaming  
Roaming Icon  
Your display screen always lets you know when you’re  
off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime you are  
roaming, the phone displays the roaming icon ( ). If  
you are roaming on a digital system, you will see the  
roaming icon along with the text – Digital Roam – .  
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you may not receive on-phone notification of  
new voicemail messages. Callers can still leave  
messages, but you will need to periodically check your  
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming  
service area for an extended period of time.  
Remember, when you are using your phone off the  
Nationwide Sprint Network, always dial numbers  
using 11 digits (1 + area code + number).  
Tip  
1. Dial 1 + area code + your phone number.  
2. Press  
.
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
     
3. Enter your passcode at the prompt and follow the  
voice prompts.  
Call Guard  
Your phone has two ways of alerting you when you are  
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network; the  
onscreen roaming icon and Call Guard. Call Guard  
makes it easy to manage your roaming by requiring an  
extra step before you can place or answer a roaming  
call. (This additional step is not required when you  
make or receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network.)  
When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network,  
voicemail notification will resume as normal.  
Setting Roam Mode  
Your phone allows you to control your roaming  
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you  
can determine which signals your phone accepts.  
To turn Call Guard on or off:  
Choose from two different settings on your dual-band  
phone to control your roaming experience.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Roaming > Call Guard.  
> Settings > More... >  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Roaming > Set Mode.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Highlight On or Off and press  
.
2. Highlight an option and press  
.
Call Guard is turned off by default on your phone.  
Note  
Ⅲ Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network. When Sprint service is unavailable, the  
phone searches for an alternate system.  
Voice dialing and speed dialing are not available  
when you are roaming with Call Guard enabled.  
Ⅲ Sprint Only to access only the Sprint network and  
prevent roaming on other networks.  
142  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:  
Data Roam Guard is set to Always Ask by default on  
your phone.  
Note  
1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the  
seven-digit number and press  
2. Press  
and complete the call.  
To answer incoming roaming calls with Call Guard on:  
.
To set your Data Roam Guard notification:  
to confirm the Roaming rate notification  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Roaming > Data Roaming.  
> Settings > More... >  
2. Highlight an option and press  
.
1. Press  
. (A message will be displayed notifying  
you that roaming charges will apply.)  
Ⅲ Always Ask sets your phone’s Data Roam Guard  
feature on. You will see a prompt and will be  
required to respond anytime you access data  
services while roaming.  
2. Press  
to confirm the Roaming rate notification  
and complete the call.  
Ⅲ Never Ask turns your phone’s Data Roam Guard  
feature off. You will not be notified of your roaming  
status when accessing data services.  
If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take  
extra steps to make and receive roaming calls.  
Note  
To use data services when Data Roam Guard is active:  
Data Roam Guard  
ᮣ
When a pop-up notification appears informing you  
that data roam charges may apply, press ROAM  
(left softkey) to connect.  
Depending on service availability and roaming  
agreements, your phone may be able to access data  
services while roaming on certain digital systems. You  
can set your phone to alert you when you are roaming  
off the Nationwide Sprint Network and try to use data  
services such as messaging.  
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
   
Your User Name  
When you buy your phone and sign up for service,  
you’re automatically assigned a user name, which is  
typically based on your name and a number, followed  
by “@sprintpcs.com.” (For example, the third John  
Smith to sign up for Sprint data services might have  
[email protected] as his user name.)  
3B. Web and Data Services  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Getting Started With Data Services (page 144)  
Accessing Messaging (page 149)  
When you use Sprint data services, your user name is  
submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint Network.  
Downloading Games, Ringers and More (page 152)  
Exploring the Web (page 155)  
Your user name will be automatically programmed into  
your phone. You don’t have to enter it.  
Data Services FAQs (page 159)  
Getting Started With Data Services  
Finding Your User Name  
If you aren’t sure what your user name is, you can  
easily find it on your phone.  
With your Sprint service, you are ready to start enjoying  
the advantages of data services. This section will help  
you learn the basics of using your data services,  
including managing your user name, launching a data  
connection, and navigating the Web with your phone.  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > Phone  
Info > Phone Number.  
144  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Updating Your User Name  
The Data Services Home Page  
If you choose to change your user name and select a  
new one online, you must then update the user name  
on your phone.  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Data > Update Data Profile. (To cancel, press Cancel  
[right softkey] before completing the update.)  
Launching a Web Connection  
ᮣ
Select  
> Home.  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press  
> Web. (Your data  
connection starts and the home page is  
displayed.)  
If Net Guard is enabled and displayed (see  
page 146), press OK (right softkey) to continue and  
launch the Web.  
Note  
Tip  
For instant access to the Internet, including the Sprint  
home page, Favorites, Recent Pages, and Google  
search, use the main screen carousel. See “2B.  
Navigating the Main Screen” on page 40 for details.  
3B. Web and Data Services  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
While connecting, an animation and a “Connecting”  
message may be displayed.  
Data Connection Status and Indicators  
Your phone displays the current status of your data  
connection through indicators at the top of the screen.  
The following symbols are used:  
To change the default launch page to the last page  
you viewed, press Menu (right softkey) > Mark this  
page and select theSet this as my homepage, select  
Save and press OK.  
Tip  
Your data connection is active (data is being  
transferred); the transmit/receive symbol will  
blink to indicate data transmission. During data  
usage, you can receive incoming voice calls or  
SMS messages; outgoing voice calls can be  
made, but the data services connection will  
terminate.  
Net Guard  
When you first connect to the Web, the Net Guard will  
be displayed to confirm that you want to connect. This  
feature helps you avoid accidental connections. You  
can disable the Net Guard in the future by selecting  
Always Auto-Connect when the Net Guard is displayed.  
Your data connection is dormant (no data is  
being sent or received). Though not currently  
active, when dormant the phone can restart an  
active connection quickly; voice calls can be  
made and received.  
To change your Net Guard settings:  
ᮣ
Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Data > Net Guard.  
Ⅲ Select On to activate the Net Guard.  
If no indicator is displayed, your phone does not have a  
current data connection. To launch a connection, see  
“Launching a Web Connection” on page 145.  
Ⅲ Select Off to deactivate the Net Guard.  
When enabled, the Net Guard appears only once as  
long as you have not turned the phone off and on.  
Note  
146  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Navigating the Web  
Portrait Mode  
Navigating through menus and Web sites during a  
data session is easy once you’ve learned a few basics.  
Here are some tips for getting around:  
Left  
Right  
Softkey  
Softkey  
Softkeys  
During a data session, the bottom line of your phone’s  
display contains one or more softkeys. These keys are  
shortcut controls for navigating around the Web, and  
they correspond to the softkeys directly below the  
phone’s display screen.  
Depending on which websites you visit, the labels on  
the softkeys may change to indicate their function.  
Tip  
Landscape Mode  
To use softkeys:  
ᮣ
Press a softkey. (If you see an additional pop-up  
menu when you press the softkey, select the menu  
items using your keypad [if they’re numbered], or  
by highlighting the option and pressing  
.)  
3B. Web and Data Services  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Links, which are displayed as underlined text, allow you  
to jump to Web pages, select special functions, or even  
place phone calls.  
Scrolling  
As with other parts of your phone’s menu, you’ll have to  
scroll up and down to see everything on some Web sites.  
To select links:  
To scroll line by line through Web sites:  
ᮣ
Highlight the link and press the appropriate softkey.  
ᮣ
Press the navigation key up and down.  
To scroll page by page through Web sites:  
Press the volume buttons on the side of the phone.  
Going Back  
To go back one page:  
ᮣ
ᮣ
Press the  
key on your phone.  
Selecting  
You can also use the  
BACKSPACE key) when you are entering text.  
key for deleting text (like a  
Once you’ve learned how to use softkeys and scroll,  
you can start navigating the Web.  
Note  
To select onscreen items:  
Going Home  
ᮣ
Use the navigation key to highlight an item, and  
then press the left softkey (or press ).  
To return to the home page from any other page:  
ᮣ
Press TOOLBAR > My Homepage.  
You’ll find that the left softkey is used primarily for  
selecting items. This softkey is often labeled “OK.”  
Tip  
If the items on a page are numbered, you can use  
your keypad (number keys) to select an item.  
148  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select an email provider (such as AOL® Mail, AIM  
Accessing Messaging  
Mail®, Hotmail®, Yahoo!® Mail, Gmail®, or Work) and  
press  
.
You can send and receive email messages, instant  
messages, and text messages and participate in  
Web-based chat rooms right from your phone.  
Messaging allows you to stay connected 24 hours a  
day anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint Network.  
– or –  
Select Work to set up a corporate email account  
using either Outlook Web Access from a Microsoft  
Exchange Server or the Sprint Mobile Email  
connector for direct access.  
Email  
– or –  
Your phone’s Email application lets you access and  
manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one  
convenient location.  
Select More to choose from additional options.  
There are many available email options listed, or  
you may add your own POP or IMAP email  
accounts.  
Getting Started With Email  
Work Email Setup: Consult your company’s IT  
department for required information and permissions  
for any Work email accounts. Read the onscreen  
setup instructions for additional information about  
setting up and using Work email options on your  
phone.  
Note  
1. Select  
> Add Email.  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press  
> Messages > Email.  
2. Press the right softkey to continue.  
4. Follow the setup wizard instructions to enter the  
required sign-up information. Press Accept (right  
softkey) if you are prompted to accept any license  
agreements or disclaimers.  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
       
4. Follow the procedures outlined in “Getting Started  
With Email” on page 149.  
The information required to sign in will vary  
depending on the email provider you are accessing.  
Note  
5. If applicable, read the notice regarding Mail Push. If  
you would like to enable Mail Push, press Yes (right  
softkey). If another notice appears, review it and  
press Yes (right softkey) again to enable Mail Push.  
Mail Push allows your phone to automatically retrieve  
new email messages without having to select the  
Send/Receive option. When Mail Push is enabled,  
you will receive an onscreen notice of new email  
messages. These notices may be charged as Text  
Messages. Please consult your service plan for  
details.  
Note  
Mail Push allows your phone to automatically retrieve  
new email messages without having to select the  
Check Mail option. When you enable Mail Push, you  
will receive an onscreen notice of new email  
messages. These notices may be charged as Text  
Messages. Please consult your service plan for  
details.  
Note  
Accessing Email  
Using Email on your phone is even easier than using  
multiple email accounts on your computer. Launch the  
application for instant access to all your accounts.  
Creating an Additional Email Account  
1. Select  
> Send Message > Email.  
1. Select  
> Send Message > Email.  
– or –  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press > Messages > Email.  
Highlight  
and press > Messages > Email.  
(The default email account Inbox is displayed).  
(The default email account Inbox is displayed.)  
2. Press the left navigation key to highlight the Home  
2. Press the left navigation key to highlight the Home  
tab and press  
.
tab and press  
.
3. Highlight your desired email account and  
press  
3. Select Add Account.  
.
150  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Use your keypad and navigation keys to read,  
Accessing Sprint Instant Messaging  
manage, and create your own emails.  
Data services also provides you with access to popular  
instant messaging (IM) clients, including AOL® Instant  
MessengerTM, MSN® Messenger, and Yahoo!®  
Messenger.  
Ⅲ Press Menu (right softkey) to select messaging  
options, such as Delete, Reply to Sender, Reply All,  
Forward, Attachments, Call Sender, Read More, Save, or  
Mark as Unread.  
1. Select  
> Send Message > IM.  
Ⅲ Press the left navigation key to select the Home  
tab and press  
.
– or –  
Ⅲ To add a new account, return to the home page  
and repeat the steps to setup a new email  
account. Follow the instructions in “Creating an  
Additional Email Account” on page 150 to set up  
a new account.  
Highlight  
and press  
> Messages > IM.  
2. Select an IM provider, such as AOL Instant  
Messenger, Windows Live Messenger, or Yahoo!  
Messenger and press  
.
3. Use your keypad to enter the required sign in  
information for the selected provider, such as user  
name or password, select Sign In (left softkey) and  
press Go (left softkey). (Your IM screen for the  
selected provider will be displayed.)  
You can also customize your main screen carousel  
to provide direct access to your email. See  
“Personalizing the Carousel” on page 42 for details.  
Tip  
You can also access certain email accounts,  
including your Sprint Mail account, through the  
Note  
In case of the MSN Messenger, the left softkey reads  
'Accept'.  
Note  
home page. Highlight  
and press  
> Web  
and then select Messaging > Email > [PCS Mail,  
AOL & AIM Mail, MSN Hotmail, or Yahoo! Mail].  
Follow the onscreen instructions to enter your  
account information and access your email  
messages.  
The information required to sign in will vary  
depending on the instant messaging provider you  
are accessing.  
Note  
3B. Web and Data Services  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to read, reply to,  
compose, and send messages and manage your  
IM account.  
Downloading Games, Ringers and  
More  
Accessing Wireless Chatrooms  
You have access to a dynamic variety of downloadable  
content, such as Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, and  
other applications. (Additional charges may apply.)  
Follow the basic steps below to access and download  
these items.  
Data services gives you the ability to join wireless  
chatrooms from your phone.  
1. Highlight  
Dating.  
and press  
> Messages > Chat &  
Accessing the Download Menus  
2. Select a chat provider and follow the onscreen  
instructions to sign up and begin chatting.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> My Stuff.  
Chat & Dating options change frequently, so check  
back often to see what’s new.  
Note  
2. Select the type of file you wish to download  
(Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, Applications, or Call  
Tones), and then select Get New. (The browser will  
start and take you to the corresponding download  
menu.)  
To access the download menus from the Web browser:  
1. From the home page, select Downloads.  
2. Select Call Tones, Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, or  
Applications to go to the corresponding download  
menu. (For more information on navigating the  
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 147.)  
152  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To download a selected item:  
Selecting an Item to Download  
1. From the item’s information page, select Buy and  
You can search for available items to download in a  
number of ways:  
press  
. (The item will download automatically.  
When you see the New Download screen you have  
successfully downloaded the item to your phone.)  
ⅷ Featured displays a selection of featured items.  
ⅷ Categories allows you to narrow your search to a  
general category, such as Country or Pop/Rock for  
Ringers or For the Ladies for Screen Savers. (There  
may be several pages of available content in a list.  
Select Next 9 to view additional items.)  
If you have not previously purchased an item, you will  
be prompted to create your purchasing profile.  
Note  
2. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ Select Use/Run/View to assign the downloaded  
item (or to start, in the case of a game or an  
application). Your data session will end, and you  
will be redirected to the appropriate phone menu  
screen.  
ⅷ Search allows you to use your keypad to enter search  
criteria to locate an item. You may enter an entire  
word or title or perform a partial-word search.  
Downloading an Item  
With Ringtones, the Listen option is available.  
Note  
Once you’ve selected an item you wish to download,  
highlight it and press  
. You will see a summary  
Ⅲ Select Set as to assign a ringer or screen saver to  
page for the item including its title, the vendor, the  
download details, the file size, and the cost. Links allow  
you to view the License Info page, which outlines the  
price, license type, and length of license for the  
download, and the Terms of Use page, which details the  
Premium Services Terms of Use and your responsibility  
for payment.  
a phone function.  
Ⅲ Select Settings to configure downloaded games or  
applications.  
Ⅲ Select Shop to browse for other items to  
download.  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Ⅲ Press  
to quit the browser and return to  
To download purchased content from My Content Manager:  
standby mode.  
1. From the My Content Manager display, highlight the  
item you wish to download, and press  
. (The  
Using My Content Manager  
information page for the selected item will be  
displayed.)  
Whether you purchase your content from your phone  
or from your online account management page at  
www.sprint.com, My Content Manager stores all of your  
purchases and you may download them to your phone  
from there.  
2. Highlight Downloads and press  
. (The item will  
download automatically. When the New Download  
screen is displayed, the item has been successfully  
downloaded to your phone.)  
My Content Manager is a storage area on the Nationwide  
Sprint Network that allows you to store all your  
purchased files. The files remain in My Content  
Manager until their license terms have expired – even  
after you have downloaded the content to your phone.  
This provides you with a convenient place to access  
information about your downloaded files without  
having to store the information in your phone’s  
memory.  
3. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ Select Use/Run/View (left softkey) to assign the  
downloaded item (or to start, in the case of a  
game or an application). Your data session will  
end, and you will be redirected to the appropriate  
phone menu screen.  
Ⅲ Select Set as to assign a ringer or screen saver to  
a phone function.  
To access My Content Manager:  
Ⅲ Select Shop (right softkey) to browse for other  
items to download.  
ᮣ
From the home page, select Downloads >  
My Content Manager. (You will see a list of your  
purchased items.)  
Ⅲ Press  
to quit the browser and return to  
standby mode.  
154  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Many sites are available under more than one menu –  
choose the one that’s most convenient for you.  
You can also access My Content Manager through  
the phone’s main menu. Highlight and press  
> My Stuff > [Games, Ringers, Screen Savers,  
or Applications] > My Stuff Manager. The browser  
will open and take you to the corresponding content.  
Tip  
Launching Google via the Carousel  
This page provides access to Web features such as  
Google™ search, online Maps, Gmail™, and  
YouTube™.  
For complete information and instructions on  
downloading Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, and  
Applications, visit the Digital Lounge at www.sprint.com.  
ᮣ
Select  
.
Using Google Search  
Exploring the Web  
1. Select  
2. Use either the keypad or keyboard to enter a string  
into the search field and press . (See  
.
With Web access on your phone, you can browse full-  
color graphic versions of your favorite Web sites,  
making it easier than ever to stay informed while on the  
go. Follow sports scores, breaking news, and weather,  
and shop on your phone anywhere on the Nationwide  
Sprint Network.  
“Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or  
“Entering Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
Launching MySpace via the Carousel  
This page provides quick access to your MySpace  
page.  
In addition to the features already covered in this  
section, the home page offers access to these colorful,  
graphically rich Web categories, including News,  
Weather, Entertainment, Sports, Money, Travel, Shopping, and  
Tools, as well as useful management options including  
My Account and Search.  
1. Highlight  
.
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
             
2. Use the navigation key to select both the email  
address and password fields, then enter the  
appropriate infomration by using either the keypad  
Using the Browser Menu  
Navigating the Web from your phone using the home  
page is easy once you get the hang of it. For details on  
how to navigate the Web, select menu items, and more,  
see “Navigating the Web” on page 147.  
or keyboard and press  
. (See “Entering Text in  
Portrait Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in  
Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
Although the home page offers a broad and  
convenient array of sites and services for you to  
browse, not all sites are represented, and certain  
functions, such as going directly to specific websites,  
are not available. For these and other functions, you will  
need to use the browser menu. The browser menu  
offers additional options to expand your use of the Web  
on your phone.  
3. Select Submit and press  
.
Launching Facebook via the Carousel  
This page provides quick access to your MySpace  
page.  
1. Highlight  
> Home and press  
.
2. Use the navigation key to select both the email  
address and password fields, then enter the  
appropriate information by using either the keypad  
or keyboard and press  
Portrait Mode” on page 30 or “Entering Text in  
Landscape Mode” on page 34.)  
Opening the Browser Menu  
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have  
an active data session, from any page you are viewing.  
. (See “Entering Text in  
To open the browser menu:  
3. Select Log In and press  
.
ᮣ
Press TOOLBAR (right softkey). (The browser menu  
will be displayed.)  
156  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To open the browser menu:  
Creating a Bookmark  
Highlight an available option under the browser menu:  
Bookmarks allow you to store the address of your  
favorite Web sites for easy access at a later time.  
ⅷ MY HOMEPAGE. Returns the browser to the home  
page.  
1. Go to the Web page you want to mark.  
ⅷ MY PAGES. Allows you to access and manage your  
bookmark and recently viewed pages. To navigate to  
a site, highlight it and press  
2. Press TOOLBAR (right softkey) to open the browser  
menu.  
, and then select  
Connect.  
3. Highlight MY PAGES > Add this page to favorites and  
press  
to save the bookmark.  
ⅷ SPRINT SEARCH. Launches a Web search.  
4. Make any modifications, press ADD (left softkey) >  
OK (left softkey) to save the bookmark.  
ⅷ OPTIONS. Displays additional options:  
Ⅲ Font size. Adjusts the onscreen Web page font size.  
Press Save (left softkey) to store the new settings.  
Ⅲ Send this page to. Allows you to send a URL via  
SMS.  
Ⅲ Clear Private data. Deletes browser data from one of  
the following: browsing history, cache, cookies,  
stored password, and previous web addresses.  
Bookmarking a page does not store the page  
contents, just its address.  
Note  
Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a  
particular Web page may be marked is controlled by  
its creator.  
Ⅲ Advanced. Lets you configure and manage your  
browser settings: Startup page, Page info, Images  
on/off, Reset browser, Turn on error logging, Send  
referrer, Redirect prompt, Reset browser settings, About  
browser, and Java scripting.  
3B. Web and Data Services  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing a Bookmark  
Deleting a Bookmark  
1. Press TOOLBAR (right softkey) to open the browser  
menu.  
1. Press TOOLBAR (right softkey) to open the browser  
menu.  
2. Highlight MY PAGES and press  
.
2. Highlight MY PAGES and press  
.
3. Highlight the desired bookmark and press  
.
3. Select a bookmark and press OPTIONS (right  
softkey) > Remove this Favorite. (A confirmation will  
be displayed.)  
Setting a New Homepage  
1. Navigate to a desired page via either a direct http  
address, selecting from a previous bookmark, or  
by searching for it via Google.  
4. Press  
> REMOVE (left softkey) > OK (left  
softkey) to remove the bookmark.  
The default homepage (Sprint Vision Home) can not  
be deleted.  
Note  
2. Press TOOLBAR (right softkey) to open the browser  
menu.  
Going to a Specific Web Site  
3. Highlight MY PAGES > Add this page to favorites and  
press  
.
To go to a particular website by entering a URL (website  
address):  
4. Highlight the Make this my homepage field, and  
press  
.
1. Select  
> Enter Web Address.  
5. Press OK (left softkey), pressADD (left softkey), and  
press OK (left softkey).  
– or –  
Highlight the Google field.  
158  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Use either your keypad or keyboard to enter the  
Data Services FAQs  
URL of the Web site you wish to go to and  
press  
3. Press DONE (left softkey) to go to the Web site.  
Not all Web sites are viewable on your phone.  
.
How will I know when my phone is ready for data service?  
Your user name (for example, [email protected])  
will be displayed when you access Main Menu > Settings  
> Phone Info > Phone Number.  
Note  
Reloading a Web Page  
How do I sign in for the first time?  
You are automatically signed in to access data services  
when you turn on your phone.  
1. Select  
> Recent Pages.  
2. Highlight a recent page from the list and press  
. (The browser will reload the current Web  
page.)  
How do I know when my phone is connected to data services?  
Your phone automatically connects when data service  
is used or an incoming message arrives. Your phone  
will also display the  
or  
indicator.  
Resetting the Web Browser  
Can I make calls and use data services at the same time?  
You cannot use voice and data services  
simultaneously. If you receive a call while data service  
is active, your phone forwards the call to voicemail. You  
can place an outgoing call anytime, but it will interrupt  
any in-progress data session.  
If the Web browser seems to be malfunctioning or  
stops responding, you can usually fix the problem by  
simply resetting the browser.  
1. Press TOOLBAR (right softkey) to open the browser  
menu.  
2. Select OPTIONS > Advanced > Reset browser settings.  
3. Complete the process by pressing RESET  
(left softkey).  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
         
When is my data connection active?  
Your connection is active when data is being  
transferred. Outgoing calls are allowed; incoming calls  
go directly to voicemail. When active, the  
or  
indicator animates on your phone’s display screen.  
When is my data connection dormant?  
If your phone receives no data for 10 seconds, the  
connection goes dormant. When the connection is  
dormant, you can make and receive voice calls. (The  
connection may become active again quickly.) If your  
phone receives no data for an extended period of time,  
the connection will terminate.  
Can I sign out of data services?  
You can sign out without turning off your phone;  
however, you will not be able to browse the Web or use  
other data services. While signed out, you can still  
place or receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use  
other voice services. You may sign in again at any time.  
To sign out, highlight  
> Settings > More... > Data > On/  
Off in your phone’s menu.  
160  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TV  
3C. Entertainment: TV and  
Music  
Your Sprint TV Channel Options  
The Sprint TV application offers a wide variety of  
accessible channels. Subscription options include  
comprehensive basic packages as well as a full menu  
of “a la carte” channels. Visit www.sprint.com for more  
information on channels and pricing.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
TV (page 161)  
Music - Sprint Music Store (page 164)  
Streaming Music (page 169)  
NASCAR (page 170)  
Someone of the available categories may include:  
ⅷ Sprint Radio  
ⅷ Primetime TV  
ⅷ Sprint TV Live  
ⅷ Sports  
ⅷ Sprint Power View  
ⅷ Music Videos  
NFL Mobile Live (page 171)  
ScanLife (page 172)  
ⅷ Music & Radio  
ⅷ Entertainment  
Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips and  
to view video clips right from your phone’s display.  
Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your  
favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network.  
ⅷ Cartoons  
ⅷ News & Weather  
ⅷ Mobile Previews  
ⅷ Movies & Shorts  
Available categories and content are subject to  
change.  
Note  
Sprint Music lets you preview, purchase, download, and  
listen to over a million songs right on your phone. You  
can even add songs from your own library to round out  
your on-the-go playlist.  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing a Video Clip  
While you are playing a clip, you can press the  
navigation key up or down to surf to a different  
channel. You will see a small pop-up screen that tells  
you which channel you are watching as well as other  
channels that you have access to. Use the navigation  
key to scroll through the channels. Once you find a  
channel that you want to watch or listen to, scroll to it  
Tip  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Entertainment > TV.  
Depending on your settings, you may be asked to  
accept a data connection.  
2. Select Sprint TV, Sprint Radio, Sprint Movies, or Premium  
Channels to display channel options.  
and press  
(or simply wait approximately three  
seconds), and the channel will begin loading.  
3. Use your navigation key and press  
to select  
a channel from the Sprint TV listings or to select an  
available category.  
TV FAQs  
1. Will I know if I’m receiving an incoming call while I’m  
viewing or listening to a media clip?  
Yes. All incoming calls will temporarily pause your  
current clip and provide you with the option to  
either SILENCE (left softkey) or IGNORE (right  
softkey).  
The first time you access a channel, you will be  
prompted to purchase access (unless the channel  
doesn't have a monthly fee). Select Subscribe to  
purchase access, or select Preview to view a preview  
of the selected channel.  
Note  
4. If applicable, highlight a clip and press  
to  
view the program. The clip will automatically load  
and begin playing.  
2. How long are the clips? Will I know the estimated time it will  
take to play the clip prior to accessing it?  
Once you have selected a channel, you will see a  
listing of the available clips, with each clip’s length  
displayed after the clip’s title. In general, a clip’s  
duration will depend on the story or content being  
provided, and can be fairly short or as long as a  
few minutes.  
162  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Can I access a clip wherever I am, as long as I have my  
phone?  
6. If I don’t subscribe to a Sprint Power Vision Plan, will I still be  
able to view the multimedia clips?  
As long as you are on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you will have access to the audio and  
video clips.  
Yes. For service access charges, please consult  
your Sprint service plan or visit www.sprint.com.  
7. What does it mean when the video pauses and I see the  
word “loading” at the bottom of the screen?  
This happens when the phone is loading the data  
necessary to play the clip. It typically occurs when  
there is heavy traffic on the network.  
Sprint TV service does not work while roaming off of  
the Nationwide Sprint Network or where service is  
Note  
unavailable.  
4. Are the videos that I’m viewing “live” videos?  
It depends on the content provider. Some of the  
channels available through Sprint TV stream live  
content. Others provide media on demand with  
video and audio clips that are refreshed throughout  
the day, but that are not “live.”  
8. How can I cancel service if I decide I don’t want it?  
To cancel your Sprint TV service, visit  
www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint with your  
account number and password. From this page,  
you have the ability to cancel the service or any  
channels to which you subscribe.  
5. After purchasing access to an Available Channel for a  
monthly fee, do I receive any confirmation? That is, how do  
I know it has been purchased?  
The next time you access the channel, you bypass  
the Preview/Purchase page and go directly to the  
available content.  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
9. If I put on my stereo headset and insert it into the phone’s  
headset jack, can I close the phone while I am playing an  
audio (or video) clip without interrupting the clip?  
Yes. When you insert your stereo headset into the  
phone’s headset jack, the phone automatically  
goes into “headset mode,” allowing you to close  
the phone and continue playing the clip. (Likewise,  
if your phone is in “headset mode,” a phone call  
will not disconnect when you close the phone.)  
Music - Sprint Music Store  
The Sprint Music Store enables you to purchase and  
download digital music files to play on your phone or  
computer.  
Accessing the Sprint Music Store  
You can access the Sprint Music Store right from your  
phone’s main menu, anywhere on the Nationwide  
Sprint Network. When you enter the store for the first  
time, the system will prompt you to set up your user  
identification and password.  
10. Can I surf to a different channel while I am playing a clip?  
Yes. While you are playing a clip, you can use the  
up and down navigation keys to surf to a different  
channel. You will see a small pop-up screen that  
tells you which channel you are watching as well  
as other channels that you have access to. Use the  
navigation keys to scroll through the different  
channels. Once you find a channel that you want  
to watch, scroll to it and press (or simply wait  
approximately three seconds), and the channel will  
begin loading.e seconds), and the channel will  
begin loading.  
1. Highlight  
Music.  
and press  
> Entertainment >  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to establish your  
User ID and password.  
Your User ID for the Sprint Music Store is your  
10-digit wireless phone number. The password may  
be any 4-digit number.  
Tip  
164  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. After you have entered your password, highlight  
Create New Account and press  
3. Highlight an option from the song’s information  
page and press  
.
:
Ⅲ Preview to play an audio clip of the selected song.  
4. Use your keypad and navigation key to explore the  
store.  
Ⅲ Buy Song to purchase the song and download it to  
your phone’s microSD card.  
Purchasing and Downloading Music  
● When you select Buy Song, the file will  
download to your phone’s microSD card. (If  
there is no microSD card installed or if there is  
not enough free memory space on the card,  
you will see an alert.)  
Now that you’re in the store, you can shop for songs to  
purchase and download to your phone’s microSD card.  
1. From the Sprint Music Store opening page, use  
your navigation key to select the Store tab then  
choose an option:  
● Once the song has been downloaded to your  
microSD card, you will see options allowing  
you to listen to the song, add it to a playlist, or  
continue shopping.  
Ⅲ Featured Music offers a revolving selection of  
highlighted songs and artists.  
Ⅲ Categories allows you to choose from categories  
such as Top 10s, New This Week, What’s Hot,  
Songs You Know, and specific musical genres.  
You can only upload unprotected MP3 audio files to  
your phone’s Music folder.  
Note  
Ⅲ Search gives you the option of searching for  
specific songs or artists. Just use your keypad to  
enter your search criteria in the available field.  
Playing Music From the Sprint Music Store  
The Sprint Music Store not only gives you access to  
great music, it also gives you a place to listen to and  
organize your music library.  
2. Highlight a song and press  
. (The song  
information screen will be displayed.)  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
Ⅲ Genres to filter the list of available music by their  
Genre information.  
Accessing the Music Player  
1. From the Sprint Music Store opening page, use  
your right navigation key to select the Player tab  
(default).  
3. Once you’ve displayed a list of songs, you can  
browse through your available titles by Song, Artist,  
or Genre to select a specific song.  
2. From the Player display, select an option:  
Ⅲ To play a song, highlight it and press  
.
Ⅲ Playlists to select a customized playlist you’ve  
created to organize your music.  
Ⅲ To listen to a playlist, select it and press  
to  
open the playlist, and then press  
again to  
●
Create Playlist... to set up a custom playlist of  
songs you like to hear together. Follow the  
onscreen instructions to create a name for the  
playlist, select songs by artist, genre, and title,  
and create an order for the playlist.  
begin playing from the selected song. (You can  
also highlight the playlist and use the softkey  
menu to begin listening.)  
Backing Up Your Downloaded Music Files  
Ⅲ Artists to filter the list of available music by their  
Artist information.  
When you purchase and download a music file  
from the Sprint Music Store, you get two versions of  
the song: one to download and play on your phone  
(file type: AAC+), and another to download from  
http://musicstore.sprint.com and play on your computer  
(file type: WMA). The AAC+ files downloaded to your  
phone can only be played on your phone, and once  
you have downloaded them, you cannot download  
them again unless you purchase them again.  
Ⅲ All Songs to browse through all of your  
downloaded music, including music purchased  
from the Sprint Music Store and any additional  
songs you have loaded onto your microSD card  
from your computer.  
Ⅲ Albums to filter the list of available music by their  
Album information.  
166  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sprint recommends you back up your AAC+ music  
files to your computer, so you can access the files in  
case your microSD card is lost or damaged, or if you  
install a new microSD card.  
Multitasking  
Multitasking is a way of maintaining one application  
active while using another. While your current music  
selection is playing, you can activate the Application  
Manager screen and choose from a list of available  
applications which can be run in tandem with your  
music.  
1. Connect your phone using a USB cable or the  
built-in connection on Bluetooth-enabled phones.  
2. Highlight  
and press  
Storage > Connect to PC.  
> Tools > Mass  
Multitasking is enabled only while using the Sprint  
Music Store (Main Menu > Entertainment > Music).  
Note  
3. Use your computer to navigate to the microSD  
card’s Music folder.  
To multitask on your phone:  
4. Select and copy the music files to a folder on your  
1. Launch the Sprint Music Store application.  
computer’s hard drive.  
(Highlight  
and press  
> Entertainment >  
Although you can store AAC+ files on your  
computer, they will only be playable on your phone  
and on your account.  
Note  
Music).  
2. From the Player tab highlight All Songs, select a  
song, and press to play the selected song.  
If you copy the files to a new microSD card, you will  
need to create a folder on the card called “MUSIC” to  
be able to play the music files.  
3. Press to exit the Music Store application  
without closing it and launch the popup menu,  
where you can choose from the following options:  
Resume, Exit, App.Manager, and Send to Background.  
Ⅲ If  
is pressed while the song is still playing,  
the display screen will reactivate the song’s  
playback screen.  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Highlight App. Manager and press  
an Application Manager screen which provides  
you access to several applications:  
to launch  
Receiving an Incoming Call While Playing Music  
An incoming call causes the currently played music file  
to be paused while the phone call is active. Once the  
current call is ended, you can select to resume any  
paused applications. (Music will resume playing  
automatically.)  
Ⅲ Application Manager manages all currently active  
applications. With your music still playing, the  
Sprint Music Store entry appears in the list.  
5. Press OPTIONS (right softkey) to access the  
1. Answer an incoming call by pressing  
.
following management options:  
2. When you are done with your call, press  
end the call. The previously paused application  
then resumes.  
to  
Ⅲ Bring to Foreground reactivates the current  
application screen. For example, if your music is  
currently playing in the background, selecting this  
option activates the Player tab with the song  
displayed.  
When placing an outgoing call, the Application  
Manager pauses your current music playback and  
allows you to proceed with your outgoing call. When  
the call is ended, the Application Manager restarts  
the music playback.  
Note  
Ⅲ Exit Application terminates the currently selected  
application and returns you to the standby screen.  
Ⅲ Exit All Background terminates all currently active  
applications and returns you to the standby  
screen.  
If the phone is running more than one simultaneous  
application (such as Music Store, Application [from  
My Stuff], and Games), the user interface can begin to  
slow down and result in music or sound interruptions.  
Ⅲ Launch New App allows you to launch an  
application from the My Contents listing.  
168  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ To solve this type of issue, it is best to close down all  
other applications (Main Menu > My Stuff > Application  
Manager > Options > Exit Application) before initiating a  
new application.  
Streaming Music  
In addition to the Sprint Music Store, Sprint offers a  
variety of musical options through the Music category  
in the Sprint TV menu, including SIRIUS Music, Music  
Choice, VH1, and many others. Choose from rock, pop,  
hip-hop, and R&B, and access exclusive video clips,  
music industry news, performances, and interviews  
with your favorite artists.  
Also, in some situations, the camera or camcorder may  
have limited functionality or become unavailable. For  
example, if you were currently playing music (via the  
Music Store), or playing a game in the background,  
and then wanted take a photo, the phone may prompt  
you with a “CPU Low, Kill the Application” dialog.  
1. Highlight  
2. Select Sprint Radio > [selection].  
3. Select to see and hear a preview of your  
selected channel (if available).  
– or –  
and press  
> Entertainment > TV.  
This indicates that the current phone resources are  
stretched and one of the current applications should be  
terminated before continuing. Refer to the procedure  
above to exit either a specific application or all current  
applications, and then launch the camera or  
camcorder again.  
Select Subscribe to purchase a monthly  
subscription to your selected channel.  
Once you have purchased access to a music or radio  
channel, you can select from a variety of stations to  
listen to your favorite music or get caught up on what’s  
new in music.  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
   
from this screen places them on your NASCAR  
home page for quick access and review.  
NASCAR  
Ⅲ News provides you with quick access to NASCAR-  
specific news, photos, and driver stats. To get  
news specific to your desired driver, you must  
touch the My Driver News button at the bottom of  
the page.  
Now you have the ability to get every bit of NASCAR  
coverage, news, and stats right on your phone.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> My Stuff >  
Applications > NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile.  
Ⅲ Stats & Schedules lets you track race information  
such as: Leaderboard standing, Pit Pass, Point  
Standings, Season Settings, Driver Profiles, Season  
Schedules, and Help.  
2. Read the permission check disclaimer, make a  
selection and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select Continue and press  
, then follow the  
remaining onscreen instructions.  
Ⅲ NASCAR on SPEED displays a list of selectable  
multimedia video clips from the SPEED channel  
that are specific to NASCAR.  
4. Access any of the following features by pressing  
MENU (right softkey):  
Ⅲ Home to return to the main NASCAR homepage  
where you can view stats on a current race,  
choose to follow a specific driver, view special  
NASCAR promotions and other NASCAR-specific  
multimedia content.  
Ⅲ Audio/Video displays a list of selectable multimedia  
content. Other features include streaming  
multimedia content from NASCAR radio stations  
or other racing radio shows.  
Ⅲ Sprint FanZone displays a list of selectable content  
available to Sprint subscribers such as  
Sweepstakes, Video clips (footage and music)  
and Screensavers.  
Ⅲ My Driver to customize your NASCAR experience  
by following specific drivers. Customizable  
options also include: My Driver News, My Driver Stats,  
and My Driver Profile. Choosing available drivers  
170  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Ⅲ Fantasy lets you take part in online fantasy racing,  
access Games, take part in Polls, and access other  
Special Promotions.  
3. Select Continue and press  
, then follow the  
remaining onscreen instructions.  
4. Select Submit and press  
, then follow the  
Ⅲ Alerts & Personalization allows you to customize  
alerts for new information such as: NASCAR  
News, Sprint Cup News, Nationwide NASCAR.  
remaining onscreen instructions to customize your  
NFL experience such as choosing your favorite  
team.  
Ⅲ Help displays help information for usage of the  
NASCAR application and features.  
5. Access any of the following features by pressing  
MENU (right softkey):  
Ⅲ Exit allows you to exit the Nascar application.  
Press Yes (left softkey) to exit.  
Ⅲ NFL Central launches the NFL homepage where  
you not only have access to your favorite teams  
but to all of the current news, network, fantasy  
leagues, scores & schedules, but also stats, alerts  
and other NFL multimedia content.  
NFL Mobile Live  
Ⅲ NFL Network launches an onscreen program from  
the NFL. This is the official NFL network providing  
daily news, interviews, and analysis from all  
around the league. Touch Watch NOW to begin  
viewing the content.  
Get the NFL live on your phone. It lets you be right in  
the middle of your favorite game by being a part of  
previews, blogs, discussions groups, fantasy football,  
etc.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Applications > NFL Mobile Live.  
> My Stuff >  
Ⅲ My Team launches a team-specific page with  
content such as standings, news and Photos,  
Audio and Video, roster and Stats, and Team  
Alerts.  
2. Read the permission, check disclaimer, make a  
selection and press OK (left softkey).  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
                 
Ⅲ Fantasy allows fantasy players to monitor the  
performance of every player in real-time directly  
from your phone.  
Ⅲ Help displays help information for usage of the  
NFL Mobile Live application and features.  
Ⅲ Teams & Standings displays standings for both the  
NFC and AFC teams via two onscreen tabs.  
ScanLife  
Ⅲ Scores & Schedules displays both pieces of  
information based on weekly schedules for your  
selected teams. Schedule By Team lets you view  
team-specific schedules. Schedule By Week lets  
you view details about NFL games based on the  
selected week.  
With ScanLife, you scan a 2D barcode (EZcode) with  
your camera phone and you’re instantly connected to  
any information related to the scanned product, article,  
or image.  
1. Highlight  
and press  
Applications > ScanLife.  
> My Stuff >  
Ⅲ News & Photos provides league news and other  
NFL related information and photos.  
2. Read the terms of use disclaimer, make a selection  
and press AGREE (right softkey).  
Ⅲ Audio & Video displays a list of selectable  
multimedia content. Other features include  
streaming multimedia content from NFL stations  
or other football programming.  
3. With the camera feature now activated, position the  
camera so the EZcode is both centered in the  
viewfinder and takes up at least half the screen  
area.  
Ⅲ Statistics lets you track Offense and Defense stats  
across the NFL and its teams.  
Ⅲ A sample of an EZcode  
.
Ⅲ Alerts & Personalization allows you to customize  
alerts for new information such as: News, Game  
Alerts, Player Alerts, Fantasy Alerts, Team Alerts,  
Promo Alerts, and other Team Information.  
Do not confuse EZcodes with the UPC barcodes  
currently used on most products, they are not the  
same.  
Note  
172  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Take the photo. If the scan was successful, you will  
hear a short chime and your browser will then  
launch to reveal more information associated with  
the selected EZcode. This can be either a specific  
Web page or downloadable content.  
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
Activating Location Mode  
Before using any of the location-based services, you  
must turn on your phone’s location mode.  
3D. GPS Navigation  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Settings > More... >  
Location. (You will see the Location disclaimer.)  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
GPS Services (page 174)  
2. Read the disclaimer and press  
.
Sprint Navigation (page 174)  
3. Highlight On and press  
.
Sprint Family Locator (page 176)  
Getting Driving Directions (page 177)  
Configuring Your Navigation Preferences (page 183)  
Launching the Product Tour (page 184)  
Sprint Navigation  
Sprint Navigation gives you turn-by-turn directions  
onscreen and over speakerphone.  
GPS Services  
Depending on your service plan, Sprint Navigation  
may require a monthly subscription. Contact Sprint  
for information and pricing.  
Note  
Your phone’s built-in GPS capability gives you access  
to a number of location-based services, including Sprint  
Navigation, Sprint Family Locator, and Live Search.  
174  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Registering Sprint Navigation  
Using Sprint Navigation  
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your phone and  
service must be registered.  
1. Select  
to access the Sprint Navigation menu.  
– or –  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
Navigation and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight  
Navigation.  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
2. Select an option and follow the onscreen  
instructions to get directions or view maps.  
Ⅲ Drive To lets you enter an address (vocally or using  
the keypad) or select from categories such as:  
2. Select each of the onscreen registration fields and  
use either the keypad or keyboard to enter the  
required information.  
●
●
●
●
My Favorites: user-defined favorite locations.  
Recent Places: recently entered locations.  
Address: manually entered street addresses.  
Ⅲ First Name, Last Name, and Email.  
Ⅲ The email must be entered properly to guarantee  
successful registration. For ease of use it’s  
recommended you use the full QWERTY  
keybaord available within Landscape mode. See  
“Entering Text in Portrait Mode” on page 30 or  
“Entering Text in Landscape Mode” on page 34.  
Intersection: used to locate a specific address  
by using two separate street addresses to  
identify an intersection.  
●
●
City: used when you do not know a physical  
address but would like driving directions to a  
city.  
3. Press Submit (right softkey) to store your  
information.  
Businesses: locations based on business  
categories.  
3D. GPS Navigation  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
●
Airports: local airports based on current GPS  
location.  
For more information about Sprint Navigation, visit  
www.sprint.com/navigation.  
Note  
Ⅲ Search lets you search for locations based on  
Name, Category, or Location.  
Sprint Family Locator  
● Categories include options such as  
Food/Coffee, Gas Stations, Gas by Price,  
Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Parking Lots, Hotels  
& Motels, Movie Theaters, Car Rentals, Taxis,  
Grocery Stores, Department Stores, Shopping  
Mall, Bar/Clubs, Hospitals, and Post Offices.  
Sprint Family Locator uses GPS technology to locate  
your child’s phone and display the location on an  
interactive map.  
Sprint Family Locator service requires an additional  
monthly fee. Visit www.sprint.com/familylocator for  
complete details.  
Note  
Ⅲ Maps & Traffic provides access to 2D and 3D maps  
for your current location and for several  
categories of locations such as Airports and  
Contacts.  
Signing Up for Sprint Family Locator  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint Family  
Ⅲ Share & More offers additional options, such as  
sharing your location with contacts, creating and  
storing My Favorites locations, accessing the  
product tour, and setting detailed application  
preferences.  
Locator.  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter and  
submit the required information.  
You can also sign up for Sprint Family Locator online  
at www.sprint.com/familylocator.  
Note  
You can access the Sprint Navigation menu from the  
main screen. Highlight the Sprint Navigation tile and  
select an option from the menu.  
Tip  
176  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Sprint Family Locator  
Getting Driving Directions  
1. Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint Family  
The built-in GPS hardware (when enabled) allows you  
to get driving directions to selected locations or  
establishments based on your current location.  
Locator.  
2. Enter the parent phone number and password and  
select DONE (left softkey) to sign in to your account.  
Using a Physical Address  
3. Select a phone to locate the available child phone  
list.  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
4. When you are finished, select Sign Out.  
– or –  
You may also use Sprint Family Locator with any  
computer with an Internet connection. Visit  
www.sprint.com/familylocator for complete details.  
Note  
Highlight  
Navigation > Drive To.  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
2. Highlight Address and press  
.
3. Highlight Type It or Speak It and press  
.
Ⅲ Type It requires that you enter the physical address  
using either the keypad or keyboard.  
Ⅲ Speak It to place a call to the TeleNav™ operator  
where you will speak the desired address. This is  
similar to calling 411 for directory assistance. (A  
fee may be incurred.)  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
       
4. If typing in the address, enter the following:  
Magnification  
Ⅲ Address: used to enter a specific address by using  
a number, street name, and city/state or zip code.  
Ⅲ City: used when you do not know a physical  
address but would like driving directions to a city.  
● As you enter in the text, a list of possible city  
matches appears onscreen. Use your  
navigation key to choose one and press  
.
Your Current Location  
Ⅲ State, ZIP or Country used when the specific  
address information is not available but you  
would like to provide some general driving  
parameters.  
Estimated Time of  
Arrival  
5. Press GO (right softkey) to enter the new address  
and receive driving directions from the GPS  
network.  
Other Driving Options  
Navigation Screen  
Once you have entered your desired location and your  
phone has begun providing you with driving directions,  
you can alter the information being displayed by using  
one of three other driving options, press View (right  
softkey): Route Summary, Traffic Summary, Map Summary,  
and Search Along.  
6. Press  
to begin the navigation session.  
When similar address matches are found, select the  
appropriate match and press  
Note  
.
7. Follow both the onscreen and audio directions.  
178  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To review real-time traffic information along your route:  
3. Enter the physical address information. See “Using  
a Physical Address” on page 177.  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
4. Press View > 2D MAP and press  
. This action  
– or –  
provides both an outlined map view and a detailed  
turn by turn description for navigating to your  
desired location.  
Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
Navigation > Drive To.  
2. Highlight Address and press  
.
To search nearby locations based on type:  
3. Enter the physical address information. See “Using  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
a Physical Address” on page 177.  
– or –  
4. Press View > Traffic Summary and press  
. This  
Highlight  
Navigation > Drive To.  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
action displays onscreen current traffic conditions  
along your current route.  
2. Highlight Address and press  
.
5. Press Back (left softkey) to return to your previous  
driving screen.  
3. Enter the physical address information. See “Using  
a Physical Address” on page 177.  
To receive turn by turn directions (2D):  
4. Press View > Search Along and press  
. This  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
allows you to then search for a location based on a  
name, location, or category such as Food/Coffee,  
etc.  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
Navigation > Drive To.  
Ⅲ See “Using a Local Business Category” on  
page 180.  
2. Highlight Address and press  
.
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
     
Ⅲ Where returns you to the Search Near page where  
you can choose from a set of seven location  
categories.  
Using a Local Business Category  
The Exclaim™ can also cross-reference your current  
location with local business and points of interest, such  
as Grocery Stores, Gas Stations, Wi-Fi Spots, Malls,  
Hospitals, etc.  
Ⅲ Entries with more than one available category (a  
subcategory) appear with an adjacent gray arrow.  
These entries can be expanded and then closed.  
1. Select  
> Drive To.  
To organize and arrange your search results:  
– or –  
1. Select a category entry from the Search page. By  
default the Search Results page lists the Best  
Matches based on closest location first (top).  
Highlight  
Navigation > Drive To.  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
.
2. Highlight Businesses and press  
2. Press GO (right softkey) and then press Options  
(right softkey) to apply the available filter options to  
best display the matching results:  
Ⅲ Pressing either  
opens the Businesses search page.  
or the right navigation key  
Ⅲ Map Results: overlaps your current list over a map  
of your current location. The numeric onscreen  
entries correspond to your current sorted list.  
3. Select a desired field and then use either your  
keypad or keyboard to enter the information.  
Ⅲ What lets you use a keyword search for your  
business.  
Ⅲ Sort by Distance: sorts a list of matching results by  
placing the closest location (to your present  
position) at the top and farthest location at the  
bottom.  
Ⅲ Category lets you refine your search by using a  
business category type such as: Food/Coffee,  
Gas Stations, Gas by Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots,  
Hospitals, Complete List, etc...  
180  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Ⅲ Sort by Rating: sorts the results by their overall  
consumer satisfaction rating (indicated by a set of  
star icons to the left of the entry). The best rated  
location (5 stars) is placed at the top of the list.  
The rating is from No stars to 5 stars.  
Creating a My Favorites Location  
Once you have begun using Sprint Navigation to find  
your destination, you can then either recall those  
locations and add them to your list of favorite  
destinations or create a new entry from one of the  
available location categories (Address, Business,  
Airport, or Contacts).  
To search for the least expensive gas in your area:  
1. Select  
> Search > Category > Gas By Price.  
– or –  
To create a My Favorites entry from your Current Location:  
Highlight  
and press > Maps > Sprint  
1. Select  
> Share & More > Record Location.  
Navigation > Search > Category > Gas By Price.  
– or –  
2. Select a grade of gasoline: Any, Regular, Plus 89,  
Highlight  
and press > Maps > Sprint  
Premium, or Diesel.  
Navigation > Share & More > Record Location.  
Ⅲ By default the Search Results page lists the Best  
Price at the top of the list.  
2. Enter a label for the newly stored location.  
3. Highlight the Save field and press  
.
3. Press GO (right softkey), highlight a gas station  
from the list, and press  
to be provided with a  
new route to the selected gas station.  
Ⅲ See “Using a Physical Address” on page 177.  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
   
To create a My Favorites location from a Recent Place:  
3. Select a category from the Share Address page,  
such as your Current Location, My Favorites  
location, Recent Places, etc..  
1. Select  
> Drive To > Recent Places.  
– or –  
4. Highlight an address and press  
. You are then  
returned to the previous Share Address page.  
Highlight  
and press > Maps > Sprint  
Navigation > Drive To > Recent Places.  
5. Select a recipient by selecting the Sent To field,  
2. Select an entry from the list and press Options (right  
softkey) > Save to Favorites.  
pressing  
, and then choosing from one of the  
following options:  
3. Enter a label for the newly stored location.  
Ⅲ Use either the keypad or keyboard to manually  
enter the recipients phone number.  
4. Select the Save field.  
– or –  
Sharing a Recent Location with Others  
Ⅲ Choose an existing Contacts entry and  
press  
.
Recently queried locations can be saved to your My  
Favorites list and also shared with other cellular  
devices.  
●
Select from Contacts to use the Find search field  
to select a recipient from your Contacts  
(qualifying Contacts entries must contain a  
wireless phone number).  
1. Select  
> Share & More > Share Address.  
– or –  
Only Contact entry numbers that are associated to a  
Mobile profile are allowed to receive this address  
information. The target phone number must be  
assigned to a Mobile profile. See “Adding a New  
Contacts Entry” on page 68.  
Note  
Highlight  
and press > Maps > Sprint  
Navigation > Share & More > Share Address.  
2. Highlight the Address field and press  
.
182  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Select Done (right softkey) to store the recipients  
● Choose from one of the following options:  
Fastest route, Traffic optimized, Shortest, Prefer  
streets, Prefer highway, Pedestrian, or Ask me each  
trip.  
and return to Share Address page.  
7. Select Send Now to complete the delivery process.  
Ⅲ Traffic Alerts: allows you to either enable (On) or  
disable (Off) real-time traffic alerts along your  
current route.  
Configuring Your Navigation  
Preferences  
Ⅲ Distance Units: allows you to alter the descriptions  
used for distances: Mi/Ft (Miles/Feet) or Km/Meters.  
1. Select  
> Share & More > Preferences.  
Ⅲ Moving Maps: allows you to select the default map  
type displayed for your navigation: 3DMovingMaps,  
2D Moving Maps, or None (Turn Icons Only).  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press > Maps > Sprint  
Navigation > Share & More > Preferences.  
Ⅲ Backlight: allows you to configure the Backlight  
setting between Always On, On At Turns, or  
Device Settings.  
2. Scroll down the list and select an entry to change  
its current setting:  
Ⅲ Name: allows you to alter the current first and last  
name registered with the service.  
Ⅲ Email: allows you to alter the email address  
registered with the service.  
Ⅲ Route Style: allows you to choose the method  
which is used to provide you directions from  
Point A to Point B. The default is Fastest route.  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
   
Ⅲ Audio Options: allows you to choose whether the  
street names are announced during your  
navigation.  
Launching the Product Tour  
ᮣ
Select  
> Share & More > Product Tour.  
● Options include: Full Audio, Instructions Only, or  
No Audio.  
– or –  
Highlight  
and press  
> Maps > Sprint  
Ⅲ Audio Language: allows you to change the  
language currently used for announcements  
between either English (US) or Spanish.  
Navigation > Share & More > Product Tour.  
Ⅲ Call In: to alter the number used when accessing  
Spoken directions from the TeleNav™ operator.  
Ⅲ Help Card: allows you to configure the settings for  
the onscreen help message (card).  
● Options include: Show Three Times, Always On,  
or Always Off.  
184  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 4  
Safety and Warranty  
Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Precautions  
4A. Important Safety  
Information  
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone  
properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.  
ⅷ To maximize performance, do not touch the bottom portion  
of your phone where the internal antenna is located while  
using the phone.  
ࡗ
ࡗ
General Precautions (page 186)  
ⅷ Speak directly into the mouthpiece.  
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone  
(page 187)  
ⅷ Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid  
spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the  
power off and remove the battery.  
ⅷ Do not expose your phone to direct sunlight for extended  
periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car).  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device (page 188)  
Caring for the Battery (page 190)  
ⅷ Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of  
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,  
bending, or sitting on it.  
ⅷ Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly  
approved in this document could void your warranty for this  
equipment and void your authority to operate this  
equipment.  
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy (page 191)  
Owner’s Record (page 193)  
User Guide Proprietary Notice (page 193)  
This phone guide contains important operational and safety  
information that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to  
read and follow the information provided in this phone  
guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or  
property damage.  
For the best care of your phone, only Sprint-authorized  
personnel should service your phone and accessories.  
Failure to do so may be dangerous and void your warranty.  
Note  
186  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio  
frequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless  
phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic  
equipment.  
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access  
to Your Phone  
Do Not Rely on Your Phone for Emergency Calls  
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot  
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should  
never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential  
communication (e.g., medical emergencies). Emergency calls  
may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain  
network services or mobile phone features are in use. Check  
with your local service provider for details.  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic operating systems or entertainment  
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their  
representative to determine if these systems are adequately  
shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the  
manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to  
your vehicle.  
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices,  
such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are  
adequately shielded from external RF signals.  
Using Your Phone While Driving  
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone  
without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions.  
Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety  
always comes first.  
Always turn off the phone in healthcare facilities, and  
request permission before using the phone near medical  
equipment.  
Note  
Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local  
Sprint Store, or call Sprint at 1-866-866-7509. You can also  
Tip  
Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying  
dial # 2 2 2 on your phone.  
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent  
possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal  
Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have  
permission from a crew member to use your phone while  
the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference,  
FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in  
the air.  
Following Safety Guidelines  
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any  
special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas  
where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or  
danger.  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
 
Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas  
Using Your Phone With a Hearing  
Aid Device  
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone  
off when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs  
indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction  
crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.  
A number of Sprint phones have been tested for hearing aid  
device compatibility. When some wireless phones are used  
with certain hearing devices (including hearing aids and  
cochlear implants), users may detect a noise which can  
interfere with the effectiveness of the hearing device.  
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a  
potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone  
and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an  
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These  
areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:  
Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this  
interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of  
interference noise they may generate. ANSI standard C63.19  
was developed to provide a standardized means of measuring  
both wireless phone and hearing devices to determine usability  
rating categories for both.  
Ⅲ Fueling areas such as gas stations.  
Ⅲ Below deck on boats.  
Ⅲ Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.  
Ⅲ Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such  
as grain, dust, or metal powders.  
Ⅲ Any other area where you would normally be advised to  
turn off your vehicle’s engine.  
Ratings have been developed for mobile phones to assist  
hearing device users find phones that may be compatible with  
their hearing device. Not all phones have been rated for  
compatibility with hearing devices. Phones that have been  
rated have a label located on the box. Your Samsung Exclaim™  
(SPH-M550) has an M4 and T3 rating.  
Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquids,  
or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that  
contains your phone or accessories.  
Note  
Restricting Children’s Access to Your Phone  
Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as  
they could hurt themselves and others, damage the phone or  
make calls that increase your Sprint invoice.  
These ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user’s hearing device and individual type and degree of  
hearing loss. If a hearing device is particularly vulnerable to  
interference noise; even a phone with a higher rating may still  
cause unacceptable noise levels in the hearing device. Trying  
188  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
out the phone with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
Should you experience interference or find the quality of  
service unsatisfactory after purchasing your phone, promptly  
return it to the store within 30 days of purchase. With the Sprint  
30-day Risk-Free Guarantee, you may return the phone within  
30 days of purchase for a full refund. More information about  
hearing aid compatibility may be found at: www.fcc.gov,  
www.fda.gov, and www.accesswireless.org.  
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements for  
hearing aid compatibility and are likely to generate less  
interference to hearing devices than unrated phones. (M4 is the  
better/higher of the two ratings.)  
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and  
are likely to be more usable with a hearing device’s telecoil (“T  
Switch”or “Telephone Switch”) than unrated phones. (T4 is the  
better/higher of the two ratings. Note that not all hearing  
devices have telecoils in them.)  
Getting the Best Hearing Device  
Experience With Your Phone  
To further minimize interference:  
Hearing aid devices may also be measured for immunity to  
interference noise from wireless phones and should have  
ratings similar to phones. Ask your hearing healthcare  
professional for the rating of your hearing aid. Add the rating of  
your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable  
usability:  
ⅷ Set the phone’s display and keypad backlight settings to  
ensure the minimum time interval:  
1. Highlight  
Backlight.  
and press  
> Settings > Display >  
2. Highlight the minimum time interval setting and press  
.
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers  
excellent use.  
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.  
ⅷ Position the phone so the internal antenna is farthest from  
your hearing aid.  
ⅷ Move the phone around to find the point with least  
interference.  
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable.  
Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you will  
have a combined rating of six for “excellent use.” This is  
synonymous for T ratings.  
Sprint further suggests you experiment with multiple phones  
(even those not labeled M3/T3 or M4/T4) while in the store to  
find the one that works best with your hearing aid device.  
4A. Important Safety Information  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides  
acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of  
times before it needs replacing.  
Caring for the Battery  
ⅷ Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long  
Protecting Your Battery  
periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules:  
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your  
battery’s performance.  
Less than one month:  
-4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)  
ⅷ Recently there have been some public reports of wireless  
phone batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It  
appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve  
counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with  
unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Sprint is  
not aware of similar problems with Sprint phones resulting  
from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved  
by Sprint or the manufacturer of your phone. Use only Sprint-  
approved or manufacturer-approved batteries and  
accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your phone’s  
manufacturer, or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also  
available at www.sprint.com — click Accessories. Buying the  
right batteries and accessories is the best way to ensure  
they’re genuine and safe.  
More than one month:  
-4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)  
Disposal of Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) Batteries  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion battery as you can  
be burned.  
For safe disposal options of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your  
nearest Sprint authorized service center.  
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In  
some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business  
trash may be prohibited.  
ⅷ In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in  
temperatures that range from 32° F to 113° F (0° C to 45° C).  
ⅷ Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high  
humidity areas, such as the bathroom.  
ⅷ Never dispose of the battery by incineration.  
ⅷ Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.  
ⅷ Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.  
ⅷ The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for  
a long period of time.  
190  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Body-Worn Operation  
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if  
you wear a handset on your body, use a Sprint-supplied or  
Sprint-approved carrying case, holster or other body-worn  
accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure  
the antenna is at least 7/16 inch (1.5 centimeters) from your  
body when transmitting. Use of non-Sprint-approved  
accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.  
Understanding How Your Phone Operates  
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When  
it’s turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF)  
signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your  
call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006  
watt to 0.2 watt in digital mode.  
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Web  
site at www.fcc.gov.  
Knowing Radio Frequency Safety  
The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP  
standards described below.  
Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless  
Phones  
The SAR value corresponds to the relative amount of RF  
energy absorbed into the head of a user of a wireless handset.  
In 1991–92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)  
joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with  
respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120  
scientists, engineers and physicians from universities,  
government health agencies and industries developed this  
updated standard after reviewing the available body of  
research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August  
1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the  
existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by  
the National Council of Radiation Protection and  
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing,  
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how  
much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at their  
highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in  
operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than  
the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of  
factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone  
design and other factors. What is important to remember is that  
each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs  
do not represent a variation in safety.  
Measurements (NCRP).  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
 
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates  
a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in  
SAR values between different model phones do not mean  
variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard  
of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.  
FCC Notice  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation  
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may  
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
The highest reported SAR values of the Exclaim™ are:  
Cellular CDMA mode (Part 22):  
Head: 0.781 W/kg; Body-worn: 1.17 W/kg  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
PCS mode (Part 24):  
Head: 0.288 W/kg; Body-worn: 1.13 W/kg  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules.  
Note  
FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission  
Guidelines.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications.  
FCC ID number: A3LSPHM550.  
More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the  
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation.  
192  
4A. Important Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sprint M550.book Page 193 Monday, April 13, 2009 1:03 PM  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
User Guide Proprietary Notice  
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated  
under one or more of the following patents:  
Reorient the direction of the internal antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
5,267,262 5,416,797 5,506,865  
5,544,196 5,657,420 5,267,261  
5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239  
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054  
5,337,338 5,710,784 5,568,483  
5,659,569 5,490,165 5,511,073  
Owner’s Record  
T9 Text Input is licensed by Nuance Communications, Inc. and  
is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat.  
6,011,554 and other patents pending.  
The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are  
located on a nameplate inside the battery compartment.  
Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will  
be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the  
future.  
User Guide template version 8a_XUI_FM (November 2008)  
Model: SPH-M550 (Samsung Exclaim™)  
Serial No.:  
4A. Important Safety Information  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
In addition to the warranty provided by your phone’s  
manufacturer, which is detailed on the following  
pages, Sprint offers a number of optional plans to  
cover your equipment for non-warranty claims. Sprint  
Total Equipment Protection provides the combined  
coverage of the Sprint Equipment Replacement  
Program and the Sprint Equipment Service and Repair  
Program, both of which are available separately. Each  
of these programs may be signed up for within 30  
days of activating your phone. For more details,  
please visit your nearest Sprint Store or call Sprint at  
1-800-584-3666.  
Note  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
ࡗ
Manufacturer’s Warranty (page 195)  
Your phone has been designed to provide you with  
reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a  
problem with your equipment, please refer to the  
manufacturer’s warranty in this section.  
For information regarding the terms and conditions of  
service for your phone, please visit www.sprint.com or  
call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.  
194  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to  
normal use; (d) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product  
in conjunction with accessories, products, or ancillary/  
peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (e) defects or damage from improper testing,  
operation, maintenance, installation, or adjustment; (f)  
installation, maintenance, and service of Product, or (g) Product  
used or purchased outside the United States or Canada.  
Manufacturer’s Warranty  
STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY  
What is Covered and For How Long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
("SAMSUNG") warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser")  
that SAMSUNG's Phones and accessories ("Products") are free  
from defects in material and workmanship under normal use  
and service for the period commencing upon the date of  
purchase and continuing for the following specified period of  
time after that date:  
This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity  
falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this  
Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery  
has been charged by a battery charger not specified or  
approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery, (ii) any of the  
seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering,  
or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the  
SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified.  
Phone  
1 Year  
1 Year  
Batteries  
Leather Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days  
What are SAMSUNG’s Obligations?  
Game Pad  
90 Days  
1 Year  
During the applicable warranty period, SAMSUNG will repair or  
replace, at SAMSUNG's sole option, without charge to  
Purchaser, any defective component part of Product. To obtain  
service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return  
Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate  
container for shipping, accompanied by Purchaser's sales  
receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale showing the date  
of purchase, the serial number of Product and the sellers'  
name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver  
the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357.  
Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or replace the  
Other Phone Accessories  
What is Not Covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of  
Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a)  
defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abuse,  
neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical  
stress, or modification of any part of Product, including antenna,  
or cosmetic damage; (b) equipment that has the serial number  
removed or made illegible; (c) any plastic surfaces or other  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
   
defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option,  
use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when  
repairing any Product or replace Product with a rebuilt,  
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced leather  
cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of  
ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be  
warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original  
Limited Warranty on the original Product or for 90 days,  
whichever is longer. All replaced parts, components, boards  
and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG.  
THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE  
COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR  
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS  
OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT  
PERTAINING THERETO.  
NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL  
BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY  
ARISE BY OPERATION OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY  
LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS  
WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME STATES/  
PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG  
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL  
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND  
RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR  
INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE OR LOSS OF USE OF THE  
PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS  
WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF  
ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES  
ARISING FROM ANY TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT COMMITTED BY  
If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and  
labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
What Are the Limits on SAMSUNG’s Liability?  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY  
CONTAINED HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT  
"AS IS," AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR  
REPRESENTATION AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY  
KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO:  
THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS  
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;  
WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;  
DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE  
PRODUCT;  
SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY  
196  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR ANY CLAIM BROUGHT  
AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME  
STATES/PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR  
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY  
TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL  
RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH  
VARY FROM STATE TO STATE/PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE  
OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS  
PRODUCT AND STATES PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.  
IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS HELD  
ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY REASON OF ANY LAW,  
SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL  
NOT AFFECT THE ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER  
OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY WHICH PURCHASER  
ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE CONSTRUED TO  
BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW  
PERMITS. THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE  
PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS  
AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY,  
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR  
SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT. THE QUALITY,  
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND  
SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE  
DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-  
PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.  
This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between  
Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing  
reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability  
contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees,  
distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to  
make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional  
warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional  
statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether  
oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and  
should not be relied upon.  
End User License Agreement for Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either  
an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co.,  
Ltd. for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and  
its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and  
licensors that accompanies this EULA, which includes  
computer software and may include associated media, printed  
materials, "online" or electronic documentation ("Software").  
BY CLICKING THE "I ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS  
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE  
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE  
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS  
IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE "DECLINE" BUTTON,  
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works  
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend,  
sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the  
Software.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and  
its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered  
as part of the product support services related to the Software  
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may  
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide  
customized services or technologies to you and will not  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of  
this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one  
copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine-  
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the  
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary  
notices contained on the original.  
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung  
may provide to you or make available to you after the date you  
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other  
terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as  
an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software  
identified by Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After  
upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the  
basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component parts,  
the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and  
you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may  
not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except  
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted  
by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or  
198  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all  
the EULA terms.  
OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR  
AVAILABILITY, OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF  
QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD  
PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST  
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE  
SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE  
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE  
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED  
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE  
WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION  
OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG  
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms  
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA,  
you shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies,  
full or partial, of the Software.  
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE,  
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE  
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE  
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that  
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy  
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED  
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS"  
AND WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  
KIND, AND SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY  
REFERRED TO AS "SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF  
SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL  
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND  
CERTAIN OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT  
PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE  
LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA,  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY  
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO  
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE  
SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE  
PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR  
OTHER SERVICES, INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND  
RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR  
OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE,  
OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY  
PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,  
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT,  
TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF  
LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU.  
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software  
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all  
other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA  
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for  
the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is  
expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not  
amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in  
Seoul, Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the  
Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration  
shall be final and binding upon the parties.  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or  
written communications, proposals and representations with  
respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by  
this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void,  
invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall  
continue in full force and effect.  
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages  
that you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including,  
without limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct  
or general damages in contract or anything else), the entire  
liability of Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your  
exclusive remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of  
the actual damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the  
Software up to the amount actually paid by you for the Software  
or US$5.00. The foregoing limitations, exclusions and  
disclaimers (including Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the  
maximum extent permitted by applicable law, even if any  
remedy fails its essential purpose.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the  
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a  
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve  
and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed  
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"  
200  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System  
(EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all  
settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung  
Customer Care Center for details.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice.  
Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care  
Center in order to provide this service at no  
charge. If the warranty has expired on the  
device, charges may apply.  
Important  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:  
1301 East Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
If you are using a handset other than a  
standard numeric keypad, dial the numbers  
listed in brackets.  
Important  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2009 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights  
reserved.  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
C
Index  
Backlight 52  
Calculator 89  
Battery 16–19  
Calendar 79–83  
Capacity 16  
Charging 18  
Disposal 190  
Installing 17  
Adding Events 79  
Adding Events to Personal  
Calendar 79  
Adding Events to Work  
Calendar 84  
Countdown 83  
Editing Events 81  
Erasing Events 81  
Event Alert Menu 80  
Task List 82  
A
Abbreviated Dialing 28, 60  
Activation 3  
Airplane Mode 57  
Alarm Clock 87  
Alert Notification 51  
Alpha 30  
Answering Calls 22  
Applications  
Downloading 152  
Automatic Speech  
Recognition 91–97  
Automatic Speech  
Recognition (ASR) 91  
Bluetooth 125–130  
FTP File Exchange 129  
Pairing 127  
PC Pairing 128  
Sending Data 129  
Sending Items 129  
Settings 126  
Viewing Events 81  
Call Forwarding 140  
Call Guard 142  
Call Waiting 139  
Callback Number 56  
Caller ID 139  
Trusted Devices 127  
Bubble  
Adding 45  
Removing 46  
Buying Ringers and Games  
152  
Camcorder 111–112  
Index  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Camera - See also Pictures  
105  
Dialing From 29  
Editing 70  
Launching the Web 145  
Password 4  
Editing a Number 71  
Entry Options 69  
Finding Entries 74  
Saving a Phone Number 69  
Secret Entries 75  
Sending Via Bluetooth 129  
Contacts Match 28  
Countdown  
Security Features 64  
User Name 144  
Default Settings. 63  
Dialing Options 21  
Digit Dial  
Options 108  
Selftimer 108  
Settings 110  
Zoom 110  
Car-Kit/Headset 60  
Carousel  
Adapting 94  
Disable Vision 64  
Display Screen 11, 52  
Brightness 53  
Adding a Tile 42  
Editing 45  
Removing a Tile 44  
Replacing Tiles 44  
Resetting 45  
Creating 83  
D
Contrast 53  
Language 54  
Data  
Shortcuts 59  
Disable 64  
Enable 64  
Data Roam Guard 143  
Data Services 144–160  
Chat 152  
Screen Saver 52  
Downloading  
Contacts 68–78  
Adding a New Group 73  
Adding a Number 70  
Adding an Entry 68  
Assigning a Picture 74, 106  
Assigning Ringers 73  
Deleting 71  
Applications 154  
Games 154  
Ringers 154  
Enabling and Disabling 64  
FAQs 159  
Home Page 145  
Screen Savers 154  
Downloading Ringers and  
Games 152  
Driving Directions 177  
204  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Erasing  
Contacts 62  
FCC Notice 192  
File Manager 86  
Email 149  
Messages 63  
My Stuff 63  
Emergency Numbers 23  
Emoticons 30  
From Name 57  
FTP Contents Folder 129  
Pictures and Video 63  
Web Cache 62  
Web Cookies 62  
Web History 62  
End-of-Call Options 25  
Enhanced 911 (E911) 24  
Entering Characters  
Letters 37  
G
H
Games  
Buying and Downloading  
152  
Google 155  
GPS Navigation  
Registration 175  
GPS Services 174  
Erasing Phone Content 62  
Event  
Numbers 37  
Preset Messages 38  
Symbols 38  
Adding 79, 84  
Alert Menu 80  
Editing 81, 85  
Erasing a Day’s Events 81  
Erasing Single Event 82  
Going To 81  
Entering Text 30–39  
ABC Mode 31  
Dual Language 34  
Emoticons 32  
Multi-tap Entry 31  
Numbers 32  
Preset Messages 32, 33  
Selecting Mode 30  
Smileys 32  
Headset 60  
Hide Secret 75  
History 65–67  
Erasing 67  
Making a Call 66  
Saving a Number 66  
Home Screen  
Bubbles 45  
Viewing 81  
Event Alert Menu 80  
Exchange Folders 129  
F
Facebook 156  
Family Locator 176  
Symbols 32  
T9 Text Input 30  
Personalizing 45  
Index  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Tutorial 41  
Music 164  
Making Calls 20  
Menu i  
In-Call Options 24  
Instant Messaging 151  
Internet - See Web 155  
My Content Manager 154  
My Driver 170  
My Favorites  
Navigation 19  
Menu Orientation 54  
Menu Style 53  
Messaging  
K
Creating from a Recent Place  
182  
Creating from Current  
Location 181  
Key Functions 9  
Key Tone 51  
Tone Length 52  
Tone Type 51  
Tone Volume 51  
Keypad Time Length 52  
Adding a New Preset  
Message 56  
Callback Number 56  
Email 149  
My Text 38  
MySpace 155  
N
Notification 55  
NASCAR  
L
Other Settings 56  
Preset Messages 55  
Signature 55  
Alerts & Personalization 171  
Audio/Video 170  
Exit 171  
Fantasy 171  
Help 171  
My Driver 170  
NASCAR on SPEED 170  
News 170  
Sprint FanZone 170  
Stats & Schedules 170  
Language 54  
Location Settings 54  
Lock Code  
Changing 61  
Locking Your Phone 61  
SMS Voice Messaging 137  
microSD Card 100–104  
Creating Folders 102  
File Manager 86  
Formatting 102  
Missed Calls 23  
Multitasking 167  
M
Main Screen Navigation 40–46  
Bubbles 45  
Carousel 42  
Tiles 42  
206  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nascar 170  
Navigating the Main Screen  
40–46  
Navigating the Menus 19  
Navigation 175  
2D Map 179  
My Team 171  
News & Photos 172  
NFL Central 171  
Phone Number  
Abbreviated Dialing 28  
Contacts Match 28  
Displaying 20  
Finding 26  
Plus Code Dialing 28  
Prepending 28  
Saving 26, 69  
NFL Network 171  
Scores & Standings 172  
Stats & Schedules 172  
Teams & Standings 172  
NFL Mobile Live 171  
Number 30  
3D Map 178  
Address 177  
Businesses 180  
Finding the Cheapest Gas  
181  
With Pauses 27  
Phone Settings 47–64  
Airplane Mode 57  
Auto-Answer Mode 60  
Call Answer Mode 59  
Default 63  
O
P
Owner’s Record 193  
Intersection 175  
Map Results 180  
Summary 179  
Traffic Conditions 179  
Navigation Preferences 183  
Net Guard 146  
NFL  
Pauses 27  
Personal Calendar 79–83  
Personalizing 47  
Ringer 47  
Screen Saver 47  
Phone (illus.) 8  
Phone Book  
Display Settings 52–54  
Language 54  
Location Settings 54  
Messaging Settings 55–57  
Sound Settings 48–52  
TTY Use 58  
Alerts 172  
Audio&Video 172  
Fantasy 172  
see Contacts  
Phone Updates 90  
PictBridge 122  
PictBridge Printing 122  
Help 172  
Index  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture Account  
Resetting 63  
Product Tour 184  
Roaming 141–143  
Call Guard 142  
R
Pictures  
Data Roam Guard 143  
Roam Mode 142  
Recent Location  
Sharing 182  
Recent Place  
Assigning as Screen Saver  
106  
S
Assigning to Contacts 106  
microSD Folders 113  
PictBridge 122  
Printing 122  
Sending Via Bluetooth 129  
Storing 113  
Safety Information 186–193  
Saving a Phone Number 26, 69  
ScanLife 172  
Scheduler 79  
Screen Savers  
Assigning Pictures 106  
Downloading 152  
Security 61–64  
Data Services 64  
Menu 61  
Settings 47–64  
Shooting Video 111–112  
Shortcuts  
Resetting 63  
Silence All 51  
SMS Text Messaging 135  
SMS Voice 138  
Adding to My Favorites 182  
Reset One Click 45  
Resetting Your Phone 64  
Resetting Your Picture  
Account 63  
Ringer Types 48, 49  
Incoming Calls 48  
Roaming 49  
Pictures - See also Camera  
105  
Sending 115  
Taking 105  
Scheduled Events 49  
Ringers  
Plus Code Dialing 28  
PowerSave Mode 53  
Preferred Roaming List 90  
Prepend 28  
Pre-set Message 56  
Preset Messages 55, 137  
PRL 90  
Assigning to Contacts 73  
Buying and Downloading 48,  
152  
Setting for Messages 49  
Silence All 51  
Vibrate 50  
208  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SMS Voice Messaging 137  
Softkeys 9  
Software Updates  
Downloading 90  
Sounds  
Sprint Picture Mail  
Downloading Online Pictures  
119  
Managing 117  
Registering 107  
Sending Pictures 115  
Uploading Pictures 118  
Sprint Service  
Text Entry  
see Entering Text  
Text Messaging 135  
Preset Messages 137  
Text Options 30, 33  
Three-Way Calling 140  
Tip Calculator 89  
TTY Use 58  
Turning Your Phone On and  
Off 15  
TV 161  
Alert Notification 51  
Key Tone 51  
Vibrate All 50  
Account Passwords 4  
Activation 3  
Dialing Sprint Services 76  
Operator Services 6  
Sprint 411 6  
Volume 50  
Special Numbers 62  
Speed Dial 29  
Assigning Numbers 71  
Sprint Family Locator 176  
Sprint Music Store 164  
Sprint Navigation  
Using 175  
Sprint One Click 40–46  
see also Main Screen  
Navigation  
U
V
Unlocking Your Phone 61  
Updating Your Phone 90  
Sprint TV 161  
Streaming Music 169  
Symbol 30  
Vibrate 50  
Videos  
Options 111  
Recording 111  
Storing 113  
Voice Dialing 92  
T
T9 Text Input 30  
T9(English) 30  
Task List 82  
Creating 82  
Managing 82  
Index  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice Memos 97  
Deleting 98  
Applications 50  
Earpiece 50  
Headset 50  
Picture Mail 50  
Ringer 50  
Speakerphone 50  
Text Message 50  
Voicemail 50  
Whisper  
Off 25  
Editing the Caption 99  
Information 99  
Playing 98  
On 25  
Wireless Backup 76  
Work Calendar 84  
Accessing Events 84  
Editing Events 85  
Selecting a Date 84  
Viewing 84  
Voice Messaging 137  
Voice Messaging (SMS) 137  
Voice Service  
Picture Mail Message 96  
Voice SMS  
W
Warranty 195  
Web 144–159  
Downloading Content 152  
World Time 89  
Z
Options 56  
Voicemail  
Zoom 110  
Email 149  
FAQs 159  
Clear Icon 134  
Notification 132  
Retrieving 133  
Setting Up 3, 132  
VoiceSMS 137  
Volume 50  
Home Page 145  
Launching 145  
My Content Manager 154  
Navigating the Web 158  
Net Guard 146  
Volume Settings  
User Name 144  
Adjusting 50  
Advanced 50  
Alarm 50  
Web Browser  
Resetting 159  
210  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Car Video System PN H701 User Manual
SnapGear Network Router 178 User Manual
Sony Computer Drive CRX225A User Manual
Sony Cordless Telephone IT ID20 User Manual
Sony Headphones MDR 7520 User Manual
Sony Music Mixer AWS G500E User Manual
Sony Speaker SAW2500 User Manual
Sunbeam Coffeemaker EM7000 User Manual
Sylvania Portable DVD Player SDVD9020 User Manual
System Sensor Smoke Alarm DH100LP User Manual